Mercedes Benz 2004 M Class Owners Manual W163_MY04_B

Mercedes-Benz-2004-M-Class-Users-Manual-398424 mercedes-benz-2004-m-class-users-manual-398424

2004 ML 350 2004_ml350_ml500

2015-09-07

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2004-M-Class-Owners-Manual-763321 mercedes-benz-2004-m-class-owners-manual-763321 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 344 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

ML 350
ML 500
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demon-
stration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de-
sire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passen-
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
ment of time:
Please read this manual carefully,
then return it to your vehicle where it
will be handy for your reference.
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are de-
signed to acquaint you with the opera-
tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
cupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction.......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees
of Mercedes-Benz automobiles ...... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 13
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada......................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 15
Symbols............................................... 16
Operating safety .................................. 17
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 17
Problems with your vehicle.................. 18
Reporting safety defects...................... 19
Reporting safety defects ................ 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Cockpit................................................. 22
Instrument cluster ................................ 24
Center console ..................................... 27
Upper part ...................................... 27
Lower part ...................................... 28
Overhead control panel ........................ 29
Getting started ................................... 31
Unlocking ............................................. 32
Remote control with folding key ..... 32
Adjusting .............................................. 34
Seats............................................... 34
Steering wheel ................................ 39
Mirrors ............................................ 40
Driving.................................................. 42
Fastening the seat belts ................. 42
Starting the engine ......................... 46
Switching on headlamps................. 48
Turn signals .................................... 49
Windshield wipers........................... 49
Rear window wiper ......................... 51
Problems while driving.................... 51
Parking and locking.............................. 53
Parking brake ................................. 53
Switching off headlamps................. 54
Turning off engine........................... 54
Contents
Safety and Security........................... 57
Occupant safety................................... 58
Airbags ........................................... 59
Seat belts ....................................... 64
Children in the vehicle.................... 67
Blocking of rear door
window operation........................... 73
Panic alarm .......................................... 75
Activating ....................................... 75
Deactivating ................................... 75
Driving and safety systems .................. 76
ABS ................................................ 76
BAS ................................................ 78
4-ETS.............................................. 79
EBP................................................. 80
ESP................................................. 80
Anti-theft systems................................ 83
Immobilizer..................................... 83
Anti-theft alarm .............................. 83
Tow-away alarm,
glass breakage sensor.................... 84
Controls in detail............................... 87
Locking and unlocking ......................... 88
Remote control with folding key..... 88
Opening the doors
from the inside............................... 90
Opening the liftgate ....................... 91
Closing the liftgate ......................... 92
Automatic central locking .............. 93
Locking and unlocking
from the inside............................... 94
Seats ................................................... 95
Removing and installing
front seat head restraints............... 95
Rear seat head restraints ............... 96
Heated seats* ................................ 98
Rear seats ...................................... 99
Third row seats* .......................... 102
Memory function* ............................. 105
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ........................... 105
Storing positions in memory ........ 106
Recalling positions from memory. 106
Lighting ............................................. 107
Combination switch ..................... 107
Fog lamps .................................... 111
Hazard warning flasher ................ 112
Interior lighting ............................ 112
Instrument cluster ............................. 116
Instrument cluster illumination .... 116
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 117
Display in the speedometer ......... 117
Resetting trip odometer ............... 118
Tachometer.................................. 118
Outside temperature indicator ..... 118
Setting the clock.......................... 118
Automatic transmission..................... 119
One-touch gearshifting ................ 120
Gear ranges ................................. 121
Gear selector lever position ......... 122
Accelerator position..................... 123
Towing a trailer ............................ 124
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 124
Contents
Transmission control
LOW RANGE mode............................. 125
Switching on LOW RANGE mode.. 125
Switching off LOW RANGE mode . 125
Good visibility .................................... 126
Rear view mirror........................... 126
Electrically folding exterior
rear view mirrors.......................... 128
Windshield wipers ........................ 129
Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 131
Rear window wiper....................... 131
Sun visor ...................................... 132
Rear window defroster................. 133
Automatic climate control ................. 134
Automatic mode........................... 137
Adjusting air volume and
air distribution manually............... 137
Defrosting .................................... 138
Air recirculation mode.................. 138
Air conditioning............................ 139
Residual heat and ventilation ....... 140
Rear passenger compartment
ventilation and rear automatic
climate control............................. 141
Front and rear air vents................ 142
Power windows .................................. 144
Opening and closing
the side windows .......................... 144
Synchronizing power windows ...... 146
Rear quarter windows* ................. 146
Sliding/pop-up roof* ......................... 148
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 148
Synchronizing the
sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 149
Driving systems .................................. 150
Cruise control ............................... 150
Parktronic system*
(Parking assist) ............................. 153
Loading............................................... 157
Loading instructions ..................... 157
Partition net* ................................ 159
Cargo area cover blind*................ 161
Cargo floor plates ......................... 162
Roof rack* .................................... 163
Useful features................................... 164
Interior storage spaces ................. 164
Cup holders .................................. 166
Armrest in rear seat bench ........... 167
Ashtrays and cigarette lighter....... 168
Electrical outlet............................. 170
Telephone* ................................... 170
Tele Aid*....................................... 171
Garage door opener...................... 180
Trip computer* ............................. 186
Contents
Operation ......................................... 191
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 192
Driving instructions............................ 193
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 193
Drinking and driving ..................... 193
Pedals .......................................... 193
Power assistance ......................... 193
Brakes .......................................... 194
Driving off..................................... 195
Parking ......................................... 196
Tires ............................................. 196
Hydroplaning ................................ 197
Tire traction.................................. 197
Tire speed rating .......................... 198
Winter driving instructions ........... 198
Standing water ............................. 200
Off-road driving ............................ 200
Trailer towing ............................... 206
Passenger compartment .............. 211
Driving abroad.............................. 211
Control and operation of
radio transmitters......................... 211
Catalytic converter ....................... 212
Emission control........................... 212
Coolant temperature .................... 213
At the gas station .............................. 214
Refueling ...................................... 214
Check regularly and before
a long trip..................................... 215
Engine compartment ......................... 217
Hood ............................................ 217
Engine oil ..................................... 218
Transmission fluid level................ 222
Coolant ........................................ 222
Battery ......................................... 223
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*......... 224
Tires and wheels................................ 226
Important guidelines .................... 226
Life of tire..................................... 227
Direction of rotation..................... 227
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 227
Rotating wheels ........................... 228
Winter driving .................................... 230
Winter tires .................................. 230
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 231
Snow chains................................. 231
Maintenance...................................... 232
Clearing the service indicator ...... 232
Service term exceeded ................ 233
Calling up the service indicator.... 233
Resetting the service indicator .... 233
Vehicle care....................................... 234
Cleaning and care of the vehicle.. 234
Practical hints ................................. 241
What to do if … .................................. 242
Lamps in instrument cluster ........ 242
Additional indicators in the
speedometer display.................... 256
Where will I find ...? ........................... 257
First aid kit................................... 257
Vehicle tool kit ............................. 257
Spare wheel (space-saver tire)..... 259
Unlocking/locking in an emergency . 261
Unlocking the vehicle................... 261
Locking the vehicle ...................... 262
Changing batteries in the
remote control ............................. 262
Fuel filler flap ............................... 263
Manually unlocking the
transmission gear selector lever .. 264
Contents
Opening/closing in an emergency .... 265
Sliding/pop-up roof*................... 265
Replacing bulbs ................................. 266
Bulbs ............................................ 266
Replacing bulbs for front lamps ... 268
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps..... 270
Adjusting headlamp aim............... 272
Replacing wiper blades...................... 273
Removing ..................................... 273
Installing ...................................... 273
Flat tire .............................................. 274
Mounting the spare wheel............ 274
Battery............................................... 278
Disconnecting the battery............ 279
Removing the batteries ................ 279
Charging and reinstalling
batteries....................................... 279
Reconnecting the batteries .......... 279
Jump starting ..................................... 281
Towing the vehicle ............................. 283
Front towing eye .......................... 285
Rear towing eye ........................... 285
Stranded vehicle .......................... 286
Fuses.................................................. 287
Fuse box in engine
compartment ................................ 287
Auxiliary fuse box in front
passenger footwell........................ 288
Technical data .................................. 289
Spare parts service............................. 290
Warranty coverage ............................. 291
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet ...................... 291
Identification labels ............................ 292
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 293
Engine ................................................ 294
Rims and tires .................................... 295
Rims and tires............................... 295
Spare wheel .................................. 296
Electrical system ................................ 297
Main Dimensions................................ 298
Weights .............................................. 299
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc............ 300
Capacities..................................... 300
Engine oils .................................... 302
Engine oil additives....................... 302
Air conditioning refrigerant........... 302
Brake fluid .................................... 302
Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 303
Fuel requirements......................... 303
Gasoline additives......................... 303
Coolants ....................................... 304
Anticorrosion/antifreeze.............. 305
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system* ......... 307
Windshield and headlamp
washer fluid mixing ratio............... 307
Consumer information........................ 308
Uniform tire quality grading .......... 308
Temperature ................................. 309
Technical terms ............................... 311
Index ................................................. 317
9
Product information
Introduction
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in indi-
vidual cases an official approval or authori-
zation by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and acces-
sories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
where you will receive comprehensive in-
formation, also on permissible technical
modifications, and where proper installa-
tion will be performed.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam-
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail-
ure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter will be glad to demonstrate the proper
procedures.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-
mation, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instruc-
tions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center will be glad to inform
you of correct care and operating proce-
dures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Book-
let are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
New Light Truck Limited Warranty,
Emission System Warranty,
Emission Performance Warranty,
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or mal-
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
(1) the same substantial defect or mal-
function results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-
fect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have direct-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different sub-
stantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
The Service Booklet describes all the nec-
essary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for service. The service advisor will record
each service in the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in ac-
cordance with standard program guide-
lines which include providing service to the
vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a
paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, howev-
er, the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center techni-
cian or the tow service provider on a
case-by-case basis and may be a factor in
our ability to respond.
Additional charges may be applicable for a
breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
determined by our authorized technician
and tow service provider.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram Brochure in your glove box.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
eign countries, please be aware that:
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
alytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
gasoline may have a considerably low-
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
14
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Warning! G
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive
passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which
may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you
make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt.
15
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color so you can find
information quickly.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
Controls in detail
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed on your ve-
hicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehi-
cle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Technical data
All important technical data for your vehi-
cle can be found in this section.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
this Operator’s Manual
the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
16
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
* Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehi-
cle.
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
Page This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
-> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to in-
dicate cross-references to term
definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
Warning! G
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
ards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
17
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
the safety precautions in this manual
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
traffic rules and regulations
motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
dards
Warning! G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are in-
terconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other sys-
tems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to
electronic components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore nev-
er turn off the engine while driving.
Warning! G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride distur-
bance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance
or repair facility for further inspection or re-
pairs.
Warning! G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
18
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If
the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management,
or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
19
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
20
21
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Center console
Overhead control panel
22
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
23
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page
1Hood lock release 217
2Parking brake pedal 53
3Parking brake release 53
4Left cup holder 166
5Combination switch
Exterior lights
High beam
Turn signals
49
6Cruise control lever 150
7Instrument cluster 116
8Hazard warning flasher
switch
112
9Lever for voice control
system*, see separate
operating instructions
Item Page
aWindshield wiper/washer
switch
49
bFront Parktronic* warning
indicator
155
cGlove box 164
dRight cup holder 166
eStorage compartment
fElectrical outlet 170
gHorn
hHeadlamp washer button* 131
jSteering lock with ignition 33
kSteering wheel lever 39
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page
1Gauge for
Coolant tempera-
ture
117
Outside tempera-
ture
118
Fuel reserve
warning lamp
252
2Knob for
Activating instru-
ment cluster
116
Adjusting intensity
of instrument lamps
116
Main odometer 117
Trip odometer
readout / reset
118
Activating Flexible
Service System
(FSS) indicator
232
Item Page
3Left indicator lamps
with:
¿Brake Assist
System
(BAS)/Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP) malfunction
warning lamp
246
{Electronic Traction
System (4-ETS) mal-
function indicator
lamp
252
-Antilock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) malfunc-
tion warning lamp
242
2Brake pad wear in-
dicator lamp
254
:Low engine oil level
warning lamp
253
Item Page
/Low engine coolant
level warning lamp
249
êLow range indicator
lamp
252
?Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
248
4Speedometer with:
v4-ETS (Electronic
Traction
System)/Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP) warning lamp
251
Trip / main
odometer
117
Display for Flexible
Service System
(FSS)
232
Engine oil level indi-
cator
219
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page
5Photo sensor
(adjusts the brightness of
the digital displays located
in 1, 4 and 8)
6Right indicator lamps
with:
WLow wind-
shield/headlamp
washer system fluid
level warning lamp
253
7Front passenger air-
bag switched off
243
Front fog lamp
switched on
111
Item Page
_Steering wheel ad-
justment not locked
253
<Seat belt non-usage
warning lamp
253
1Supplemental Re-
straint System
(SRS) indicator
lamp
255
ÉBrake warning lamp 244
#Charge indicator
lamp
254
AHigh beam head-
lamp indicator
49
Item Page
7Knob for setting clock 118
8Tachometer with:
Display for Selector
lever position
121
Clock 118
9KRight turn signal
indicator lamp
aLLeft turn signal
indicator lamp
27
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part Item Page
1Air vents, automatic
climate control
142
2MCS, see separate
operating instructions
3Automatic climate control 134
Rear window defroster
switch
133
4Seat heater switch*,
passenger side
98
5Rear quarter window
switch*, right
146
6ESP control switch 80
Item Page
7Rear window
wiper/washer switch
51
8Rear quarter window
switch*, left
146
9Seat heater switch*,
driver’s side
98
aFront and rear fog lamp
switch
111
bIndicator lamp for antitheft
alarm system
83
cTransmission control
switch, LOW RANGE mode
125
28
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page
1Ashtray with cigarette
lighter
168
2Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
46
3Power window switch, right
front door
144
4Power window switch, right
rear door
144
5Parktronic system*
deactivation switch
156
6Storage compartment with
cup holder
166
Item Page
7Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment switch
40
Exterior rear view mirror
electrically folding*
128
8Central locking switch 93
9Power window switch, left
rear door
144
aSwitch for rear door win-
dow override
73
bPower window switch, left
front door
144
29
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item Page
1Front left interior lighting 112
2Signal transmitter buttons
for garage door opener
180
3Front right interior lighting 112
4Roadside Assistance
button
175
Information button 177
5Interior lighting control 112
6Trip computer* display 186
7Rear view mirror 126
Item Page
8Right reading lamp on/off 114
9Automatic antiglare func-
tion* on/off
126
aLeft reading lamp on /off 114
bGlass breakage sensor 84
cTrip computer* control 186
Tow-away alarm switch 85
dTele Aid* (emergency call
system) button
171
eSliding/pop-up roof*
switch
148
30
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
32
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the infor-
mation given here.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page refer-
ences are located at the end of each seg-
ment.
Unlocking
Remote control with folding key
Remote control with folding key
1ÂPanic button (page 75)
2ŒUnlock button
3Lock button
4Release button for key
5ŠUnlock button for liftgate
Press unlock button Πon the re-
mote control.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
Press release button 4 on the remote
control.
The key folds out.
Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
the steering lock (page 33).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (page 88).
33
Getting started
Unlocking
Steering lock positions
0For removing key
The steering is locked when the key is
removed from the steering lock. If
necessary, move steering wheel
slightly to allow the locking mechanism
to engage.
1Unlocking steering
Power supply to some electrical con-
sumers, such as seat adjustment.
2Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3Starting position
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
i
The key can only be withdrawn in
position 0.
If necessary, move steering wheel
slightly to allow the key to be turned
clockwise to position 1.
A warning sounds when the driver’s
door is opened and the key is in steer-
ing lock position 0 or 1.
The key can only be removed from the
steering lock with the gear selector le-
ver in position P.
!
To prevent accelerated battery dis-
charge and a possible dead battery, al-
ways remove the key from the steering
lock when the engine is not in opera-
tion.
34
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Seats
The seats can be adjusted either manually
or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s
equipment.
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas-
tening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively re-
clined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck.
That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
The seat back and seat belts provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in an up-
right position and belts are properly posi-
tioned on the body. Your seat must be
adjusted so that you can correctly fasten
your seat belt (page 42).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being ad-
justed.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock your
vehicle.
The power seats* can also be operated with
the appropriate door open. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions.
1BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Manual seat adjustment
1Seat fore and aft adjustment
2Backrest tilt
3Seat height
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Lift handle 1.
Slide seat to the desired position.
Allow handle 1 to reengage.
Check for proper seat engagement
before driving.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating posi-
tion that still allows you to reach the
accelerator /brake pedal safely. The posi-
tion should be as far rearward as possible,
consistent with ability to properly operate
controls.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
36
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat backrest tilt
Turn handwheel 2 forward or back-
ward until your hands are slightly ang-
led when holding the steering wheel.
Seat height
Lift handle 3.
Use your body weight to push the seat
downwards.
Lift your weight off the seat to obtain a
higher seat position.
Release lever 3.
Head restraint height
1Release button
Raising:
Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
Lowering:
To lower the head restraint, push
release button 1 and press down on
the head restraint.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint tilt
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
More information on seats can be found in
the “Controls in detail” section
(page 95).
Power seat* adjustment
The seat adjustment switch is located on
the entry side of each front seat base.
1Backrest tilt
2 Seat fore and aft adjustment
3Seat cushion tilt
4Seat height
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2 (page 33).
or
Open the driver’s or passenger door.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 1.
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach
the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
The position should be as far to the rear
as possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or be-
hind the seat. Otherwise you could
damage the seat.
The memory function* (page 105)
lets you store the setting for the seat
positions together with the setting for
the exterior rear view mirrors.
38
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion tilt
Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Seat backrest tilt
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 1 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Seat height
Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 4.
Head restraint height
1Release button
Raising:
Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
Lowering:
To lower the head restraint, push
release button 1 and press down on
the head restraint.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
39
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint tilt
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
More informations on seats can be found
in the “Controls in detail” section
(page 95).
Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment
1Lever
To unlock the steering column, move
lever 1 to its stop down.
Move steering wheel to the desired po-
sition.
To lock the steering column, move
lever 1 to its stop up.
The steering wheel is once again
locked into position.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
ing, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock your ve-
hicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
40
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic condi-
tions.
Interior rear view mirror
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
Exterior rear view mirrors
!
Do not drive the vehicle until you have
properly locked the steering column.
If the indicator lamp _ (page 26)
comes on while the engine is running,
the steering column is not locked prop-
erly. Warning! G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory sys-
tem. In case it does, immediately flush af-
fected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
side rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are on the lower part of the
center console.
1Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
2Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror
3Adjustment button
Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2
(page 33).
All lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
Press button 1 for the left mirror or
button 2 for the right mirror.
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
For more information, see “Electrically
folding exterior rear view mirrors”
(page 128).
!
For information on how to reposition
the exterior mirror housing when it was
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
from the front), see “Folding exterior
mirrors in and out manually*”
(page 128).
i
With the front doors closed, the exteri-
or mirrors can still be adjusted for ap-
proximately 30 minutes after the
ignition has been switched off.
i
The memory function* (page 105)
lets you save the exterior mirror set-
tings together with the seat and
steering wheel settings.
i
At low outside temperatures, the exte-
rior mirrors will be automatically
heated.
42
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Fastening the seat belts
Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot-
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear-
ance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as ex-
pected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (page 58).
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions.
1BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
43
Getting started
Driving
1Latch plate
2Buckle
3Release button
4Seat belt outlet
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the back-
rest reclined. Sitting in an excessively re-
clined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
rious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and the belt
is properly positioned on the body.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt.
Warning! G
Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (page 62) and (page 64).
44
Getting started
Driving
With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from seat belt outlet 4.
Place the belt over your shoulder.
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 2 until
it clicks.
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
correct height (page 45).
Proper use of seat belts:
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoul-
der portion is located as close as possi-
ble to the middle of the shoulder (it
should not touch the neck or pass un-
der the arm).
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
right position.
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
son and another object at the same
time.
Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.
Ensure that the seat belt is always fit-
ted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective-
ness of the belts.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
45
Getting started
Driving
Seat belt height adjustment
Seat belt height can be adjusted for the fol-
lowing seats:
Driver’s seat
Passenger seat
Outer rear seats
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder por-
tion is located as close as possible to the
middle of the shoulder (it should not touch
the neck or pass under the arm).
1Release button
Adjusting seat belt higher
Slide belt outlet upward.
The belt outlet engages in various posi-
tions.
Adjusting seat belt lower
Press and hold release button 1.
Slide belt outlet in desired position and
let go of release button 1.
46
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
PPark position with gear selector lever
lock
RReverse gear
NNeutral
DDrive position
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (page 119).
Starting
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
Do not depress the accelerator.
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (page 33).
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine,
see “Turning off engine” (page 54).
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open.
47
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
Turn key in starter to position 0 and re-
peat starting procedure.
Remember that extended starting at-
tempts can drain the battery.
Get a jump start (page 281).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a mal-
function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Parking brake
1Parking brake pedal
2Release handle
Release the parking brake by pulling on
handle 2.
The indicator lamp É in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Driving
Depress the brake pedal.
Place the gear selector lever in
position D or R.
Release the brake pedal.
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Children could release the parking
brake, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
48
Getting started
Driving
After a cold start, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts at a higher engine revolution.
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
its operating temperature earlier.
More information can be found in the “Op-
eration” section (page 191).
For information on off-road driving, see
“Driving instructions” (page 200).
Switching on headlamps
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1 Off
2Low beam headlamps on
3High beam lamps on
Turn the switch to õ.
Low beam headlamps on.
!
If you hear a warning signal when driv-
ing off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
!
Place the gear selector lever in
position R only when the vehicle is
stopped in order to avoid damaging the
transmission.
!
Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
life of the engine.
49
Getting started
Driving
High beam
Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam indicator A in the
instrument cluster comes on.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (page 110).
Turn signals
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
Combination switch
1Turn signals, right
2Turn signals, left
Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
The switch is automatically cancelled
when the steering wheel is turned to a
large enough degree.
Windshield wipers
The wiper switch is located on the right of
the steering column.
Wiper switch
0Windshield wipers off
1Intermittent wiping
2Normal wiper speed
3Fast wiper speed
4Wiping with windshield wiper fluid
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal flashes three times.
50
Getting started
Driving
Switching on windshield wipers
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Turn the wiper switch to the desired po-
sition 1,2 or 3, depending on the
intensity of the rain.
Single wipe
Press wiper switch briefly in the direc-
tion of arrow 2.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
Pull and hold wiper switch in direction
of arrow 4.
The windshield wiper operates with
washer fluid.
Information on filling up the washer reser-
voir can be found in the “Operation” sec-
tion (page 224).
!
Vehicles with rain sensor*:
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
mittent setting when the vehicle is tak-
en to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper-
ate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
The switch should not be left in inter-
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the en-
gine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry wind-
shield.
!
If anything blocks the windshield wip-
ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
For safety reasons, withdraw key
from steering lock before attempt-
ing to remove any blockage.
Remove blockage.
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position 1,
set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
51
Getting started
Driving
Rear window wiper
The button is on the upper part on the cen-
ter console.
1Intermittent wiping
2Indicator lamp
3Wiping with washer fluid
Switching on intermittent wiping
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Press upper half 1 of the button.
Switching off intermittent wiping
Press upper half 1 of the button
again.
Wiping with washer fluid
Press and hold lower half 3 of the but-
ton.
After releasing the button the wiper op-
erates for additional five seconds.
More information on windshield wipers can
be found in the “Controls in detail” section
(page 129).
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
An ignition cable may be damaged.
The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
Give very little gas.
Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
52
Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is over 248°F
(120°C)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
Check the coolant level and add cool-
ant if necessary (page 222).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
Do not start the engine under any cir-
cumstances.
Notify local fire and / or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
termined:
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
major assemblies
fuel system
engine mount:
Start the engine in the usual manner.
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Parking brake
1Parking brake
2Release handle
Step firmly on parking brake 1.
When the engine is running, the indica-
tor lamp É in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
Warning! G
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re-
moving the key from the steering lock. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is
removed.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
Turn the key to starter switch position 0
and remove.
Take the key and lock vehicle when leav-
ing.
54
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps
Turn the combination switch to 1
(page 48).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (page 107).
Turning off engine
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
Turn the key in the steering lock
(page 33) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
Move the steering wheel slightly to al-
low the locking mechanism to engage.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Children could release the parking
brake and/or move the gear selector lever
from position P, either of which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, when parked on an in-
cline, position P alone may not prevent your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (page 53).
When parked on an incline, also turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
i
Always set the parking brake in addi-
tion to shifting to position P.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the road curb.
i
The key can only be removed from the
steering lock with the gear selector le-
ver in position P.
55
Getting started
Parking and locking
Press the seat belt release button
(page 42).
Allow the retractor to completely re-
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
button on the remote control
(page 32).
The turn signal lamps flash three times
and the locking knobs on the doors
move down.
More information on parking and locking
can be found in the “Controls in detail”
section (page 88).
i
With the key removed and the driver’s
door open, a warning sounds if the ve-
hicles exterior lamps are not switched
off.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, ensure that there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
ous personal injury.
56
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving and safety systems
Anti-theft systems
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im-
portant facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
Seat belts
Emergency tensioning device
Airbags
Child seat
Child seat recognition
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH)
As independent systems, their protective
effects work in conjunction with each
other.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (page 26) comes on for about
four seconds when you turn the key in the
steering lock to position 2. It goes out
when you start the engine. This shows that
the restraint systems are operational.
If the lamp does not come on at all or if it
fails to extinguish after approximately four
seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a mal-
function in the system has been detected.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (page 255).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(page 67).
Warning! G
In the event that the 1malfunction indi-
cator lamp comes on during driving or does
not come at all, the SRS may not be opera-
tional.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
be activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
essarily which could also result in injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems, in-
cluding incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unin-
tended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be per-
formed by qualified technicians. Contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Airbags
Warning! G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury and fatality in certain frontal (front
airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and
head protection window curtain airbags) im-
pacts which may cause significant injuries.
However, no system available today can to-
tally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releas-
es a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some tempo-
rary breathing difficulty for people with asth-
ma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
Warning! G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and passenger to always be in a prop-
erly seated position and to wear your seat
belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body (page 42).
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc-
cupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously in-
jured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat back-
rest.
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breast-
bone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combina-
tion of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any prob-
lems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Airbags and emergency tensioning de-
vices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time only basis. An airbag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dash-
board.
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
side the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates. 컄컄
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Adjust the passenger seat as far as pos-
sible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side impact airbag in-
flates. This could result in serious inju-
ries or death should the airbag be
triggered. Always sit upright, properly
use the seat belts and appropriate size
infant or child restraint system.
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
vate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa-
tal injury will result.
1BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
sult in severe injuries to you or other occu-
pants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s
Manual.
Warning G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger front airbag
(page 70). BabySmartTM will not, howev-
er, turn off any side impact airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact airbags there is a
possibility for a side airbag related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not prop-
erly seated or restrained when next to a side
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
side impact in order to do its job.
컄컄
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines: (1) occupants, espe-
cially children, should never place their bod-
ies or lean their heads in the area of the door
where the side airbag inflates. This could re-
sult in serious injuries or death should the
side airbag be activated; (2) always sit up-
right, properly use the seat belts and use an
appropriately sized infant or child restraint
system for all children 12 years old or under;
and (3) always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear door
mounted side airbags deactivated, then de-
activation can be accomplished upon your
written election to do so at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center at an ad-
ditional cost. Please contact your local au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
or call our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
for details.
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,
or side (side impact and head protec-
tion window curtain airbags) impacts
which exceed preset thresholds.
Only during these types of impacts, if of
sufficient severity to meet the deploy-
ment thresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should al-
ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to pro-
vide their supplemental protection.
In cases of other frontal impacts, an-
gled impacts, roll-overs, other side im-
pacts, rear collisions, or other
accidents, the airbags will not be acti-
vated. The driver and passengers will
then be protected by the fastened seat
belts.
We caution you not to rely on the pres-
ence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to acti-
vate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the poten-
tial and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passen-
ger that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to ensure that the vehicle will continue
to provide supplemental crash protec-
tion for occupants.
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Warning G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts in-
stalled or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or re-
moving any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front airbag cov-
er, or door trim panels, and installation
of additional electrical/electronic
equipment on or near SRS components
and wiring. Keep area between airbags
and occupants free from objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
Airbags and emergency tensioning de-
vices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time only basis. An airbag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projec-
tiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain airbag is deployed.
An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unin-
tended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop-
erative or causing unintended airbag de-
ployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abra-
sions or other injuries resulting from air-
bag deployment.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front airbags
1Driver airbag
2Passenger front airbag
3Side impact airbag
Driver and passenger front airbags are
deployed:
in the event of a frontal impact
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
independently of the side impact air-
bags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment thresholds. You will then be protec-
ted by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front airbag will only be
deployed if:
the passenger seat is occupied
the 7indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is not lit (page 26)
the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
ment threshold
Warning! G
In the event that the 1malfunction indi-
cator lamp comes on while driving, the SRS
may not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center im-
mediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be activated
when needed in an accident, which could re-
sult in serious or fatal injury, or it might de-
ploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in injury. !
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system's deployment threshold.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Side impact airbags, window curtain
airbags
1Window curtain airbags
2Side impact airbag, rear
3Side impact airbag, front
The side impact airbags and window
curtain airbags are deployed:
on the impacted side of the vehicle
in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
independently of the front airbags
The front passenger side impact airbag will
only deploy if the system senses that the
front passenger seat is occupied.
The side impact airbags and window
curtain airbags are not deployed in im-
pacts which do not exceed the system’s
deployment threshold.
Seat belts
When the engine is started, the seat belt
non-usage warning lamp < illuminates
to remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened before the engine is
started, the seat belt non-usage warning
lamp < illuminates and a warning
chime sounds for approximately
six seconds when the engine is started.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states and all Canadian provinces. Even
where this is not the case, all vehicle occu-
pants should have their seat belts fastened
whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Information on fastening seat belts is
found in the “Getting started” section
(page 42).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(page 67).
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the back-
rest reclined. Sitting in an excessively re-
clined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
rious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and the belt
is properly positioned on the body.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt.
Warning! G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this sec-
tion, as that could result in serious inju-
ries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag,
front passenger airbag, front and rear
door mounted side impact airbags and
window curtain airbags), ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device for the
outboard passenger seats [except in the
optional third row seats]), and front seat
knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the pro-
tection offered to properly belted occupants
in certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(side impact airbags and window curtain air-
bags) impacts which exceed preset deploy-
ment thresholds.
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
verely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdo-
men. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects.
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
sure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device, seat belt
force limiter
The seat belts for the front seats are
equipped with emergency tensioning de-
vices and belt force limiters. The outboard
passenger seats belts (except in the third
row seats*) are equipped with emergency
tensioning devices.
The ETD is designed to activate only when
the seat belt is fastened and in the follow-
ing cases:
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
ing a preset severity level
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1indicator lamp (page 58)
In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-
es remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on oc-
cupants during a crash.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
Ensure that the infant or child is prop-
erly secured by a belt at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and infor-
mation on choosing an appropriate re-
straint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Warning! G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tension-
ing device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system’s deployment threshold.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems
Use only a BabySmartTM1 compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
We recommend that all infants and
children be properly restrained at all times
while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoul-
der belts except the driver’s seat belt have
special seat belt retractors for secure fas-
tening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child re-
straint instructions for mounting. Then pull
shoulder belt out completely and let it re-
tract. During the seat belt retraction a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
vated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual man-
ner.
1BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
i
Information on child seats with mount-
ing fittings for tether anchorages
(page 71).
For information on child seat anchors –
LATCH type (page 72).
Warning! G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the U.S. territo-
ries and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and 210.2. A statement
by the child restraint manufacturer of
compliance with this standard can be
found on the instruction label on the re-
straint and in the instruction manual
provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM System installed in the ve-
hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury can result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions.
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning! G
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap /shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, re-
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
cident.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
hicle equipment and may cause an accident
and /or serious personal injury.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
Special BabySmartTM1 compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center, are required for use with the
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
With the special seat properly installed,
the passenger front airbag will not deploy.
The 7indicator lamp located in the in-
strument cluster will be illuminated, ex-
cept with the key removed or in steering
lock position 0 (page 33).
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2, the 7indicator lamp lo-
cated in the instrument cluster comes on
for approximately six seconds, extin-
guishes, then flashes once.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not func-
tioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before
seating any child on the front passenger
seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (page 243).
1BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
i
The system does not deactivate the
door mounted side impact airbag, the
window curtain airbags and the emer-
gency tensioning device.
Warning! G
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys-
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
tem. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the 7indicator lamp remains illumi-
nated.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
system
Guide top tether strap between head
restraint and top of seat back. Head
restraint must be installed and posi-
tioned such that the top tether strap
can pass freely between the head re-
straint and top of seat back.
1Hook
2Anchorage ring
Securely fasten the hook 1 to the an-
chorage ring 2.
For safety, make sure the hook has at-
tached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
Vehicle without third row seats
3Anchorage rings for second row seats
4Anchorage rings for third row seats*
This vehicle is provided with three tether
anchorages 3 for a top tether strap be-
hind the second row seats.
Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
Warning! G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
passenger seat. Signals from such devices
may interfere with the BabySmartTM system.
Such signal interference may cause the
7indicator lamp not to come on during
self-test or be continuously lit, indicating
that the system is not functioning.
!
Do not use the tether anchorages 4
for a top tether strap on a second row
seat.
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Vehicle with third row seats*
3Anchorage rings for second row seats
4Anchorage rings for third row seats*
This vehicle is provided with tether anchor-
ages for a top tether strap behind the
second row seats 3 and the third row
seats 4.
When using the third row observe the
following:
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems with a top tether strap is al-
lowed only on both third row seats plus
the center second row seat.
When using the center second row seat
for a top tether strap, the left third row
seat should only be used for a child re-
straint system, since exiting the vehicle
may not be possible in an emergency
due to the routing of the top tether
strap.
When installing an infant or child re-
straint system with a top tether strap
on the left second row seat, the left
third row seat should not be occupied.
Child seat anchors – LATCH type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a LATCH child seat with
matching anchor fittings.
1Anchors
Install a LATCH type child seat accord-
ing to the manufacturer’s instructions.
!
An infant and child restraint system
must not be installed on the right
second row seat while a passenger
rides in a third row seat. An infant and
child restraint system installed on the
right second row seat will prevent the
use of the easy-entry/exit feature
(page 101).
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation
1Switch for rear door window override
Slide the switch to the right.
A dot becomes visible. The rear win-
dows can no longer be operated using
the switch in the rear doors.
i
With a child seat installed in the left
rear seat, the seat belt for the center
seat occupied by a passenger must op-
erate freely. Guide seat belt between
its seat cushion mount and backrest
mount along outside of right side child
seat mount.
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Warning! G
Install child seat according to manufactu-
rer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 1 (page 72).
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be re-
placed.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
For more information on power windows,
see the “Controls in detail” section
(page 144).
Warning! G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure them-
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
dow opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
ous personal injury.
75
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing turn signal
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.
1Âbutton
Activating
Press and hold button 1 for at least
one second.
Deactivating
Press button 1 again.
or
Insert key in steering lock.
i
For operation in the USA only: This de-
vice complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
76
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Driving and safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)
EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
ABS
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even with light brake pressure.
The -indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (page 25) comes on when you
turn the key to position 2. It goes out when
the engine is running.
i
In winter operation, the maximum ef-
fectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the
ESP, the EBP, and the 4-ETS is only
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires)
or snow chains as required.
Warning! G
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
Excessive speed, especially in turns
Wet and slippery road surfaces
Following another vehicle too closely
ABS, BAS, ESP and 4-ETS cannot reduce this
risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
Warning! G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
77
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Braking
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the pul-
sation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
LOW RANGE– ABS
During off-road driving, a special low range
system for the ABS is operational with
transmission in LOW RANGE mode
(page 125).
When applying the service brakes at
speeds below approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are
locked cyclically to shorten the braking
distance (dig-in effect). This affects steer-
ing the vehicle.
i
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS,
the EBP, ESP, and the 4-ETS are also
switched off.
Normal driving and braking functions
are still available.
78
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
For more information, see “The yellow ABS
warning lamp comes on while driving.”
(page 242).
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
tially reducing braking distance. Apply con-
tinuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
The ¿indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (page 25) comes on when you
turn the key to position 2. It goes out when
the engine is running.
For more information, see “The yellow
BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.” (page 246).
Warning! G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-
forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
ardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Warning! G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
ties of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
79
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
4-ETS
The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
improves vehicle’s ability to utilize avail-
able traction, especially under slippery
road conditions. The brakes are applied to
the spinning wheel and power is trans-
ferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
The traction control engages at vehicle
speeds up to approximately 24 mph
(40 km/h), and switches off at approxi-
mately 50 mph (80 km/h).
The {indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (page 25) comes on when you
turn the key to position 2. It goes out when
the engine is running.
The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v, loca-
ted in the speedometer dial, starts to flash
at any vehicle speed, as soon as the tires
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
Warning! G
When you see the 4-ETS/ESP-warning
lamp v flashing in the speedometer,
then proceed as follows:
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
While driving ease up on the accelera-
tor.
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resul-
ting from excessive speed.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
tion, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Active braking action through ESP may
otherwise seriously damage the front
or rear axle brake system.
Operational tests with the engine
running can only be conducted on a
two-axle dynamometer.
i
If the yellow 4-ETS malfunction indica-
tor lamp { comes on while the
4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v flash-
es, the electronic traction system is be-
ing switched off temporarily to prevent
overheating of the drive wheel brakes.
80
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
LOW RANGE 4-ETS
During off-road driving, a special low range
system for the 4-ETS is operational with
transmission in LOW RANGE mode.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (page 242) and
(page 252).
EBP
The EBP enhances braking effectiveness
by allowing the rear brakes to supply a
greater proportion of the braking effort
without a loss of vehicle stability.
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of ad-
hesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slip-
pery road surfaces.
The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer flashes when the ESP is en-
gaged.
The ¿indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (page 25) and the 4-ETS/ESP
warning lamp v in the speedometer
come on when you turn the key to
position 2. They go out when the engine is
running.
Warning! G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
4-ETS/ESP-warning lamp v flashing in
the speedometer. In this case, proceed as
follows:
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accelera-
tor.
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
81
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
LOW RANGE – ESP
During off-road driving, a special low range
system for the ESP is operational with
transmission in LOW RANGE mode
(page 125).
In the LOW RANGE mode, the ESP ope-
rates in a traction improving fashion spe-
cifically adapted for off-road driving. At
speeds below 27 mph (45 km/h), the ESP
assists in over-/understeering, thus im-
proving vehicle traction.
Switching off the ESP
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip such as:
starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
in sand or gravel
when driving off-road
Warning! G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
ties of an ESP equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
tion, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1) when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Active braking action through ESP may
otherwise seriously damage the front
or rear axle brake system.
Operational tests with the engine
running can only be conducted on a
two-axle dynamometer.
Warning! G
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circum-
stances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
dard driving maneuvers.
82
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
The switch is located in the upper center
console.
ESP on/off switch
Press upper half of the ESP switch.
The 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in
the speedometer comes on.
The ESP is deactivated.
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
the 4-ETS/ ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer flashes, regardless of the
speed.
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when the ESP is deactivated.
The ESP always operates when you are
braking, even when it has been deactiva-
ted.
Switching on the ESP
Press lower half of the ESP switch until
the 4-ETS/ESP warning lamp v in
the speedometer goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(page 241).
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
Turn ESP on immediately if the afore-
mentioned circumstances do not apply
anymore.
Warning! G
When the 4-ETS/ ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
83
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
Removing the key from the steering lock
activates the immobilizer.
Deactivating
Turning the key in the steering lock to
position 2 (page 33) deactivates the im-
mobilizer.
Anti-theft alarm
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone:
opens a door
opens the liftgate
opens the hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immedi-
ately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
unlocking and opening the driver’s
door with the mechanical key
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the remote control. The
turn signal lamps flash three times to indi-
cate that the alarm system is activated. A
red lamp in the center console will flash af-
ter approximately 10 seconds when the
alarm system is completely armed
(page 27).
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(vehicle’s battery is in order), the sys-
tem is not operational. Contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in
Canada).
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid* sys-
tem (page 171) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are avail-
able.
84
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the remote con-
trol. The turn signal lamps flash once to in-
dicate that the alarm system is
deactivated.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2.
or
Press the Πor button on the
remote control.
The alarm is canceled.
Tow-away alarm, glass breakage
sensor
The tow-away alarm and the glass break-
age sensor are part of the anti-theft alarm
system.
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone:
attempts to raise the vehicle
breaks a window and reaches into the
passenger compartment
i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, the tow-away - glass
breakage sensor is malfunctioning or
one of the following elements may not
be properly closed:
a door
the liftgate
the hood
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
i
The alarm system will rearm automati-
cally again after approximately
40 seconds if one of the doors or the
liftgate is not opened.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
gered, for example, if the vehicle is
lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid* sys-
tem (page 171) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are avail-
able.
85
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming tow-away alarm and glass
breakage sensor
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
and glass breakage sensor alarm is auto-
matically armed.
Disarming tow-away alarm and glass
breakage sensor
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm and
glass breakage sensor before towing the
vehicle, or when parking on a surface sub-
ject to movement, such as a ferry or auto
train.
Vehicles with trip computer*
The buttons are located in the overhead
control panel.
1Reset button
2Mode button
3Display
4Glass breakage sensor
Turn key in steering lock to position 2
(page 33).
Return key to position 0 and remove it
from the steering lock.
Within 30 seconds press button 1
or 2.
The display shows
OFF
.
Exit vehicle and lock vehicle with
remote control (page 32).
The tow-away alarm and glass breakage
sensor remain switched off until the key is
inserted in steering lock and turned to
position 1.
86
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Vehicles without trip computer
The buttons are located in the overhead
control panel.
1Switching off tow-away alarm and glass
breakage sensor
Turn key in steering lock to position 2
(page 33).
Return key to position 0 and remove it
from the steering lock.
Within 30 seconds press button 1 on
the right or left side.
Exit vehicle and lock vehicle with
remote control (page 32).
The tow-away alarm and glass breakage
sensor remain switched off until the key is
inserted in steering lock and turned to
position 1.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2.
or
Press the Πor button on the
remote control.
The alarm is canceled.
87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Automatic transmission
Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
88
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to ope-
rate the equipment installed in your vehi-
cle. If you are already familiar with the ba-
sic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are
given at the beginning of each segment.
Locking and unlocking
Remote control with folding key
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
remote controls with folding key.
The remote control provides an extended
operating range. To prevent theft,
however, it is advisable to only unlock the
vehicle when you are in close proximity to
it.
The key centrally locks and unlocks:
the doors
the liftgate
the fuel filler flap
1ÂPanic button (page 75)
2ŒUnlock button
3Lock button
4Release button for key
5ŠUnlock button for liftgate
i
If the key is inserted in the steering
lock, the vehicle cannot be locked or
unlocked with the remote control.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the remote control to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking
Unlocking the driver’s door and fuel
filler flap
Press button Πonce.
All turn signal lamps flash once to indi-
cate that the driver’s door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked.
Global unlocking
Press button Πtwice.
All turn signal lamps flash once to indi-
cate that all doors, fuel filler flap and
liftgate are unlocked.
Unlocking the liftgate
Press button Š.
Only the liftgate unlocks.
Locking
Press button once.
All turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that all doors, the liftgate
and the fuel filler flap are locked.
i
Unlocking the vehicle with the remote
control deactivates the anti-theft
alarm.
The vehicle will lock again automatical-
ly and reactivate the anti-theft system
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
locking if neither door nor liftgate is
opened.
i
Locking the vehicle with the remote
control activates the anti-theft alarm.
i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following ele-
ments may not be properly closed:
a door
the liftgate
the hood
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock your ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and / or seri-
ous personal injury.
90
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Loss of remote control with folding key
If you lose a remote control or the folding
key, you should do the following:
Have the remote control deactivated
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Report the loss of the remote control or
the folding key immediately to your car
insurance company.
If necessary have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center will be glad to supply you
with a replacement.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
1Locking knob
2Inside door handle
Pull on door handle 2.
If a door was locked, locking knob 1
will move up.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the remote control, then
the batteries in the remote control are
discharged, the remote control is mal-
functioning or the vehicle battery is
drained.
Check the batteries in the remote
control and replace them if neces-
sary (page 262).
Use the folding key to unlock or
lock the doors and the liftgate.
Check the vehicle battery
(page 278).
Synchronize the remote control
(page 263).
If the remote control is malfunctioning,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the liftgate
Opening the liftgate from outside
A minimum height clearance of 7 ft
(2.15 m) is required to open the liftgate.
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
1Grip molding
2Handle
Pull on handle 2.
Swing the liftgate upward by using the
grip molding.
Opening the liftgate from inside
A minimum height clearance of 7 ft
(2.15 m) is required to open the liftgate.
The release lever is located on the inside of
the liftgate.
1Handle
2Catch
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the re-
mote control, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the alarm.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
following:
Switch on the ignition by turning the
key in the steering lock to position 2.
or
Press the or Œbutton on the
remote control.
The alarm is cancelled.
!
Always make sure that there is suffi-
cient overhead clearance.
i
The vehicle must be unlocked.
92
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
To unlock the liftgate, move the
catch 2 to the right.
Pull handle 1 down and swing liftgate
upward.
Closing the liftgate
1Recessed grip
2Grip molding
Pull down on recessed grip 1.
Close liftgate by using grip molding 2.
!
Always make sure that there is suffi-
cient overhead clearance.
i
To lock the liftgate, move the catch 2
to the left.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Children could open the liftgate
from inside, which could result in an acci-
dent and/or serious personal injury.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the liftga-
te opening when closing the liftgate. Be es-
pecially careful when small children are
around.
Do not close the liftgate from the inside by
pulling on the handle.
Warning! G
Only drive with the liftgate closed as exhaust
fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
i
To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do
not place the key in the cargo compart-
ment.
93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the liftgate automatically
lock when the ignition is switched on and
the left front wheel turns at vehicle speeds
of approximately 9mph (15km/h) or
more.
If one of the front doors is then opened
from the inside, the vehicle is unlocked
centrally unless only the driver's door was
previously unlocked.
Information on towing the vehicle can be
found in the “Practical hints” section
(page 241).
The switch is located on the lower center
console.
Central locking switch
1Locking
2Unlocking
Activating
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
Press and hold upper part 1 of the
central locking button for approximate-
ly six seconds.
The automatic central locking is
activated.
Deactivating
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
Press and hold lower part 2 of the
central locking button for approximate-
ly six seconds.
The automatic central locking is deacti-
vated.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact ex-
ceeds a preset threshold.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic cen-
tral locking when the vehicle
is pushed or towed
is on a test stand
94
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
tailgate from inside using the central lock-
ing switch. This can be useful, for example,
if you want to lock the vehicle before start-
ing to drive.
Locking
Press upper part 1 of central locking
button (page 93).
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
Press lower part 2 of central locking
button (page 93).
The vehicle unlocks.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock and lock the vehi-
cle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi-
cle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the remote control, it will
not unlock using the central locking
switch.
95
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the “Getting started” section
(page 34).
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints
Information on head restraint adjustment
can be found in the “Getting started” sec-
tion (page 34).
Front seat head restraints
Removing head restraints
Pull head restraint to its highest
position.
Push button 1 and pull out head
restraint.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
96
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing head restraint
Insert head restraint and push it down
to the stop.
Push button 1 and adjust head
restraint to the desired position
(page 36).
Rear seat head restraints
Head restraint height
Raising:
Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
Lowering:
To lower the head restraint, push
button 1 and press down on the head
restraint.
Head restraint tilt
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
More informations on seats can be found
in the “Getting started” section
(page 34).
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
97
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing rear seat head
restraints
Removing rear seat head restraints
Pull head restraint to its highest
position.
Push button 1 and pull out head
restraint.
Installing rear seat head restraints
Insert head restraint and push it down
to the stop.
Push button 1 and adjust head
restraint to the desired position
(page 36).
Stowing rear center head restraint
1Rear center head restraint
2Bar
3Clip
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
i
For a better view toward the rear, you
can store the rear center head restraint
underneath the rear seat (page 97). 컄컄
98
Controls in detail
Seats
Remove rear center head restraint
(page 96).
If necessary, remove cargo floor plates,
see “Removing cargo floor plates”
(page 162).
Slide rear seats forward, see “Adjusting
rear seat fore and aft” (page 99).
Fold rear seat backrests down, see
“Folding down the backrest”
(page 100).
From cargo compartment, attach rear
center head restraint 1 to underside
of rear center seat.
Make sure front side of head
restraint 1 is facing upward.
Press bar 2 on both sides into
clips 3.
Heated seats*
Both switches for the front seats are loca-
ted in the center console.
1Normal heating
2Rapid heating
Start the engine.
Switching on seat heating
Press upper switch position 1.
A red indicator lamp on the switch
lights up.
Switching off seat heating
Press upper switch position 1 again.
The indicator lamp on the switch turns
off.
Switching on rapid seat heating
Press lower switch position 2.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
turn on.
i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
20 minutes.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one red indicator lamp
remains on.
컄컄
99
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off rapid seat heating
Press lower switch position 2 again.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
turn off.
Rear seats
The rear seats are divided asymmetrically.
To enlarge the cargo area you can adjust
the left and right part separately. The fol-
lowing changes are possible:
moving the seat fore and aft
folding down the backrest
lowering the seat
Adjusting rear seat fore and aft
1Release lever
Pull release lever 1 in direction of
arrow.
Slide seat to the desired position until
it locks in place.
!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are flashing, there is in-
sufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off auto-
matically.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as suffi-
cient voltage is available.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the rear seats while driving.
Always seat in an upright position and the
seat belts are properly positioned on the
body. Your seat must be adjusted so that
you can correctly fasten your seat belt.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being ad-
justed.
Warning! G
Failure to assure that seats are locked into
place could result in an increased chance of
injury in an accident.
100
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding down the backrest
1Lock button
Close cup holder (page 167) and
ashtray (page 169) in rear center
console (page 167).
Move front seats forward. Manual seat
(page 35) or power seat (page 37).
Slide seat forward.
Remove head restraint(s) (page 95).
Pull lock button 1 up and fold back-
rest forward until it locks in place.
The red backrest lock indicator at lock
button 1 is not visible in the locked
position.
Folding up the backrest
Close cup holder (page 167) and
ashtray (page 169) in rear center
console.
Pull lock button 1 up and unfold back-
rest until it locks in place.
Make sure the seat belt is not caught in
the seat.
Check for secure locking by pulling and
pushing on the backrest.
The red backrest lock indicator at lock
button 1 is not visible in the locked
position.
Install head restraint (page 96).
Slide seat rearward to desired position
(page 99).
Adjust front seats to desired position.
Manual seats (page 35) or power
seats (page 37).
Lowering the rear seat
1Release button
2Lever
3Release lever
101
Controls in detail
Seats
Close cup holder in rear center console
(page 167).
Move front seats forward. Manual seat
(page 35) or power seat (page 37).
Press and hold release button 1 to un-
lock lever 2.
Pull lever 2 in direction of arrow.
Pull release lever 3 and push down
rear seat until it locks in place.
Fold down the backrest (page 100).
Adjust front seats to desired position.
Manual seats (page 35) or power
seats (page 37).
Folding up the rear seat
Move front seats forward. Manual seat
(page 35) or power seat (page 37).
Pull release lever 3 and raise rear seat
until it locks in place.
Easy entry/exit feature*
The easy entry/exit feature allows access
to the third row seats*. The right cargo
floor plate must be removed (page 162).
Folding rear seat forward
1Lever
Move right seat forward. Manual seats
(page 35) or power seats
(page 37).
Move rear seat forward (page 99).
Push head restraint fully down and tilt
it forward.
Fold backrest forward (page 100).
Pull lever 1 up and fold the rear seat
forward.
Warning! G
Failure to assure that seats are locked into
place could result in an increased chance of
injury in an accident.
Warning! G
Never drive with the second row right seat
folded forward (easy entry/exit feature). It
could open and fold back unintentionally.
102
Controls in detail
Seats
Resetting rear seat
Pull down on seat bench until it locks
into place.
Pull lock button 1 (page 100) up
and unfold backrest until it locks into
place.
Check for secure locking by pulling and
pushing on the backrest.
The red backrest lock indicator at lock
button 1 (page 100) is not visible in
the locked position.
Move the rear and front seats in de-
sired position.
Pull up and adjust head restraint
(page 36).
Third row seats*
Folding down single seat
1Head restraint
2Hook
3Tensioner
4Hook and loop velcro strip
Remove cargo floor plate
(page 162).
Remove head restraint 1 from seat
cushion.
Lift tensioner 3 upward to a horizon-
tal position to release tension of the
belt.
Disengage hook 2 while holding onto
the seat firmly with one hand.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that head restraint
supports the back of the head at eye level.
This will reduce the potential for injury to the
head and neck in the event of an accident or
similar situation.
Failure to assure that seats are locked into
place could result in an increased chance of
injury in an accident.
Never place hands under seat or near any
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
103
Controls in detail
Seats
Attach belt at hook and loop velcro
strip 4 (page 102) on underside of
seat.
5Backrest release
6Seat release
Fold seat down until it locks securely in
place.
The red marking on the seat release 6
should not be visible.
Store cargo floor plates inside the
backrest (page 162).
Pull backrest release 5 and unfold
backrest until it locks securely in place.
Install head restraint 1 in backrest
(page 102).
Storing single seat
Remove head restraint from backrest
(page 102).
Pull backrest release 5 and fold back-
rest forward until it locks securely in
place.
Remove cargo floor plates from the
backrest.
Pull seat release 6 (page 103) and
fold seat up.
Disengage belt and engage hook 2
(page 102) in ceiling mount.
Pull on free end of belt until tight.
Install head restraint in openings
provided in seat cushion.
Install cargo floor plates (page 162).
Warning! G
After folding the seats up, manually place
the lap belt portion of the seat belt behind
the seat (arrow). Otherwise, the lap belt may
be subject to damage and could rip.
104
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing single seat
1Hook
2Tensioner
3Hook and loop velcro strip
4Release lever
Lift tensioner 2 upward to a horizon-
tal position to release tension of the
belt.
Disengage hook 1 while holding onto
the seat firmly with one hand.
Attach belt at hook and loop strip 3
on underside of seat.
Move release lever 4 upward and re-
move seat.
Installing single seat
Place seat into the mounting clamps
and click the seat into place.
105
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Memory function*
With the memory button you can store up
to three different settings for the driver-
and passenger seat.
Together with the driver’s seat you can
store the exterior rear view mirrors.
For the front passenger seat you can store
the seat position.
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position feature, see “Activating exterior
rear view mirror parking position”
(page 127).
1Position buttons
2Memory button
!
Prior to operating the vehicle the driver
should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to en-
sure adequate control, reach and com-
fort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. See also the
section on airbags (page 59) for
proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, opera-
tion and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be ad-
justed for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and
210.2.
Warning! G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
106
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Storing parking position
Stop the vehicle.
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
Press button 2.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 3 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
Press memory button 2 (page 105).
Within three seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 3.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
Storing positions in memory
Adjust the seat (page 37) and exteri-
or rear view mirrors (page 40) to the
desired position.
Push memory button 2 (page 105).
Release memory button and press one
of the position buttons 1 within three
seconds.
All the settings are stored at the select-
ed position.
Recalling positions from memory
Press and hold one of the position
buttons 1 until seat and rear view mir-
rors have fully moved to the stored po-
sitions.
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
The selected position will be stored rel-
ative to the position button 1
(page 105) pressed.
!
Do not operate the power seats using
the memory button if the seat backrest
is in an excessively reclined position.
Doing so could cause damage to front
or rear seats.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored posi-
tions.
107
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the head-
lamps (page 48) and use the turn signals
(page 49), see the “Getting started” sec-
tion.
Combination switch
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
1High beam
2High beam flasher
MOff
UAutomatic headlamp mode
CParking lamps, license plate lamps
and instrument panel lamps
Canada only: With the engine run-
ning, the low beam headlamps
additionally switched on.
õLow beam or high beam headlamps
ƒLeft or right standing lamps
(symbol on underside of switch)
i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is regis-
tered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
108
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
combination switch. For combination
switch, see (page 107).
Automatic headlamp mode
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
Turn the combination switch to U.
i
If you remove the key and open the
driver’s door while the parking lamps or
low beam headlamps are switched on,
then a warning sounds.
Warning! G
If the combination switch is set to U,
the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
edly when the system senses bright am-
bient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
vate headlamps by turning combination
switch to õ when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to õ with the
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
to õ will briefly switch off the head-
lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an acci-
dent.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
i
If the automatic headlamp mode is ac-
tivated, the fog lamps can also be
switched on (page 111). The low
beam headlamp and parking lamps are
activated simultaneously.
109
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Canada only:
Turn combination switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the parking
lamps will also switch on.
When you shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(three minutes delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the
combination switch to position õ to
permit activation of the high beam head-
lamps.
Night security illumination
When you turn off the engine and the last
door has been closed, the following lamps
will remain lit:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Front fog lamps
The combination switch must be set to
position U (page 107).
Deactivating night security illumination
temporarily
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key
in the steering lock to position 0
(page 33) then turn it to position 2
and back to 0.
The night security illumination is deac-
tivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
start the engine.
Setting illumination time
1Switch for fog lamps
i
The high beam flasher is always avail-
able.
i
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door or the
liftgate.
If you do not open a door or the liftgate
after turning off the engine, the lamps
will automatically switch off after
60 seconds.
110
Controls in detail
Lighting
Stop the vehicle.
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
Turn combination switch to
position M.
Press upper part 1 of switch until the
clock, located in the instrument clus-
ter, displays the actual illumination
time.
Press upper part 1 of switch again.
Each time the switch is pressed, the
illumination time increases by
15 seconds. You can set the illumina-
tion time between 0 (off) and
60 seconds.
Approximately five seconds after pressing
the switch, the illumination time is set and
the clock is displayed again.
Locator lighting
During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the vehicle is unlocked by
remote control:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Front fog lamps
The combination switch must be set to
position U (page 107).
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off au-
tomatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.
Switching on high beams
Turn the combination switch
to õ(page 107).
Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam indicator A in the
instrument cluster comes on.
High beam flasher
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
111
Controls in detail
Lighting
Fog lamps
The switch is located on the upper center
console.
1Front fog lamps
2Indicator lamp
3Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp
Switching front fog lamps on and off
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
Press upper part 1 of switch.
The green indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on.
Press upper part 1 of switch again.
The green indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Switching front fog lamps and rear fog
lamps on and off
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
Press lower part 3 of switch.
The green indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on in addi-
tion to the yellow indicator lamp 2 in
the switch.
Press lower part 3 of switch again.
The green indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster and the yellow indi-
cator lamp 2 in the switch go out.
Switching rear fog lamp on and off
Press upper part 1 of switch.
The yellow indicator lamp 2 in the
switch goes out.
Press upper part 1 of switch.
The green indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Warning! G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching
from U to B will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
i
The fog lamps can be switched on with
combination switch in position õ
or U. Consult your state Motor Reg-
ulations regarding allowable lamp oper-
ation.
112
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be activa-
ted with the ignition switched on or off. It
is activated automatically when an airbag
is deployed.
The switch is located on top of the steering
column.
Hazard warning flasher switch
Switching on hazard warning flasher
Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
All the turn signals will flash.
Switching off hazard warning flasher
Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
1Left front interior lamp lens
2Right front interior lamp lens
3Automatic function off
4Automatic function on
5Rear interior lighting
i
If the hazard warning flasher was acti-
vated automatically, press the hazard
warning flasher switch twice to deacti-
vate.
113
Controls in detail
Lighting
Automatic control
Activating automatic control
Bring the rocker switch to center
position 4.
Interior lamps (except cargo compart-
ment lamp) are switched on in dark-
ness, when you
unlock the vehicle
open a door
remove the key from the steering
lock
In addition, the entry/exit lamps in the
door trays will come on when you open
a door.
When all doors are closed and no key is
inserted in the steering lock, the interi-
or lamps are switched off after a brief
delay.
Deactivating automatic control
Press lower part 3 of rocker switch.
The interior lighting and the entry/exit
lamps remain switched off in darkness,
even when you
unlock the vehicle
open a door
remove the key from the steering
lock
Manual control
Switching on front interior lamps
Press on lamp lens 1 or 2.
The respective lamp switches on.
Switching off front interior lamps
Press on lamp lens 1 or 2 again.
The respective lamp switches off.
Operating rear interior lighting with
rocker switch
Press on upper part 5 of rocker
switch.
The rear interior lighting goes on.
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps (except cargo compartment
lamp) switch off automatically after ap-
proximately 30 minutes.
i
If a lamp is switched on manually, it will
not go out automatically. This could
cause the battery to become dis-
charged.
컄컄
114
Controls in detail
Lighting
Press on upper part 5 of rocker
switch again.
The rear interior lighting goes off.
If the switch is pressed while the rear
interior lighting is on, the function is re-
versed.
Operating rear interior lighting with
lamp lens
Rear interior lighting
Push on lamp lens (arrow) to switch
rear interior lighting on or off.
Reading lamps in inside rear view
mirror
1Reading lamps
2Reading lamps on/off
Switching reading lamp on and off
Press button 2.
The lamp switches on.
Press button 2 again.
The lamp switches off.
Cargo compartment lamp
1Switched off
2Switched on continuously
3Automatic control
Switching off cargo compartment lamp
Slide the switch to position 1.
The cargo compartment lamp is
switched off, even when the liftgate is
opened.
컄컄
115
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on continuous cargo
compartment lamp
Slide the switch to position 2.
The cargo compartment lamp is
switched on continuously.
Automatic control
Slide the switch to position 3.
The cargo compartment lamp is
switched on and off by opening or clos-
ing the liftgate.
i
To prevent the vehicle battery from be-
ing discharged, make sure the switch is
not in position 2 when leaving the ve-
hicle.
116
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (page 24).
1Left knob
2Right knob
The instrument cluster is activated when
you:
open the driver’s door
turn the key in steering lock to
position 1 or 2 (page 33)
press the left knob 1
Instrument cluster illumination
To brighten illumination
Turn knob 1 clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
To dim illumination
Turn knob 1 counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
i
You can set the instrument cluster illu-
mination with the following lamps on:
parking lamps
low beam headlamps
high beam headlamps
117
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge
Under normal driving conditions, the cool-
ant temperature may rise to 248°F
(120°C). The coolant temperature may
climb to the red marking:
at high outside temperatures
during stop-and-go city traffic
when driving on hilly terrain
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature in the red zone.
Doing so may cause serious engine dam-
age which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Display in the speedometer
Changing display
Press the left knob 1 in the instru-
ment cluster (page 116).
The display changes between main
odometer and trip odometer.
Press the left knob 1 twice.
The next scheduled service is displayed
(page 232).
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
118
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Resetting trip odometer
Press the left knob 1 (page 116) re-
peatedly until you see the trip odome-
ter display.
Press and hold the left knob 1 until
the trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
above its specified limit.
Outside temperature indicator
The outside temperature is displayed in
the instrument cluster (page 24).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Setting the clock
Hour
Pull out the right knob 2 in the instru-
ment cluster (page 116) and turn it
counterclockwise.
Minutes
Pull out the right knob 2 in the instru-
ment cluster (page 116) and turn it
clockwise.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
i
To set the clock by a single hour or a
few minutes, turn knob 2 just a few
degrees in the direction indicated for
hours or minutes.
119
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
Information on driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the “Getting
started” section (page 46).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjust-
ments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its gear shift program.
The automatic transmission selects indi-
vidual gears automatically, depending on:
the gear selector lever position D with
gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (page 121)
the position of the accelerator pedal
(page 123)
the vehicle speed
The current gear selector lever position
appears in the tachometer display
(page 24).
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by
limiting the gear range
changing gears manually
i
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
120
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
gear selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D– direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (page 121).
Upshifting
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simul-
taneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Canceling gear range limit
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the tachometer display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D– direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the gear selector lever is moved to
the D– direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
121
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D,
you can limit the transmission’s gear range
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
The selected gear range appears in the
tachometer display. If you press on the
accelerator when the engine has reached
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Effect
éThe transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
èThe transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
Effect
çThe transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
on steep downgrades
in mountainous regions
under extreme operating
conditions
æThe transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
122
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
Effect
ìPark position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The key can only be removed
from the steering lock with the
gear selector lever in position P.
With the key removed, the gear
selector lever is locked in
position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
(page 264).
íReverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
ëNeutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the trans-
mission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
êDrive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
123
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
More throttle Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (page 53).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, take it with you
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Children could move
the gear selector lever from position P,
which could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
124
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Towing a trailer
If you tow a trailer, note the following
points:
Manually shift to a lower gear range
(4,3, 2, 1), if the transmission hunts
between gears on inclines
(page 121).
A lower gear range and reduction of
speed reduces the change to overload
or overheat the engine.
At very steep inclines switch transfer
case to LOW RANGE mode
(page 125).
For more information on trailer towing, see
the “Operation” section (page 206).
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
mission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
Stop the vehicle.
Move gear selector lever to position P.
Turn off the engine.
Wait at least ten seconds before
restarting.
Restart the engine.
Move selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
125
Controls in detail
Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode
Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode
In the following situations you should
switch to LOW RANGE mode:
during off-road driving
when crossing water
when towing up or down on steep
gradients
Switching on LOW RANGE mode
LOW RANGE mode switch
Stop the vehicle.
Move the gear selector lever to
position N.
Press on the upper part of the switch.
During the changeover the indicator
lamp (page 25) flashes three times.
Once the changeover is complete, the
indicator lamp comes on continuously.
Switching off LOW RANGE mode
Stop the vehicle.
Move the gear selector lever to
position N.
Press on the upper part of the switch.
During the changeover the indicator
lamp (page 25) flashes three times.
Once the changeover is complete, the
indicator lamp goes out.
For information on driving safety systems
during LOW RANGE mode see the “Safety
and Security” section (page 76).
!
Only switch the LOW RANGE mode on
or off, when the vehicle is
at a complete standstill
the engine speed is less than
1500 rpm
Failure to do so may result in transmis-
sion or engine damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
!
You should only operate the vehicle on
a single axle dynamometer for briefly
testing the brakes.
The key must be in steering lock
position 1 (page 33).
126
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(page 49) and for setting the rear view
mirrors (page 40) is found in the
“Getting started” section.
Rear view mirror
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
position
1Lever
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night po-
sition by moving lever 1 towards the
windshield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror*
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when:
the automatic antiglare function is acti-
vated (page 127)
the ignition is switched on
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror
The rear view mirror will not react if
reverse gear is engaged
the interior light is turned on
Warning! G
The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the cargo area is fully
loaded.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning! G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory sys-
tem. In case it does, immediately flush af-
fected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
127
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating
1Button
2Indicator lamp
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Deactivating
Press button 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
The buttons are on the lower part of the
center console.
1Deactivating parking position
2Activating parking position
3Adjustment button
Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (page 106).
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
Press button 2.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liq-
uid state and by applying plenty of wa-
ter.
컄컄
128
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Engage reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror moves automatically to the
stored parking position.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
stored driving position:
ten seconds after you put the gear
selector lever in position D
immediately once your vehicle exceeds
a speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
immediately when you press the
button 1 for driver’s side mirror
Electrically folding exterior rear view
mirrors
Folding exterior mirrors in and out
manually*
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not completely folded out.
The buttons are located on the upper cen-
ter console.
1Folds the exterior mirrors in
2Folds the exterior mirrors out
Check that the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
i
If the button 1 is pressed, the auto-
matic passenger-side exterior rear view
parking position is deactivated.
!
Before driving the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold the exterior
mirrors in. Otherwise they may get
damaged.
i
With the front doors closed, the exteri-
or mirrors can still be folded in and out
approximately 30 minutes after the ig-
nition has been turned off.
컄컄
129
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Folding in
Briefly press button 1 (page 127).
The mirrors fold in.
Folding out
Briefly press button 2.
The mirrors fold out.
Windshield wipers
Information on the windshield wipers is
found in the “Getting started” section
(page 49).
!
Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold the exterior
mirrors in, otherwise they may get
damaged.
i
If you are driving at more than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not
able to fold the exterior mirrors in.
!
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear), reposition it manually by applying
firm pressure until it snaps back into
place.
If an exterior rear view mirror is forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front)
press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then
press button 2 to fold mirrors out. Do
not force mirrors by hand as this may
damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is now properly po-
sitioned and you can adjust the mirror
normally.
!
If leaves, snow, etc. block the wind-
shield wipers, the wiper motor turns
off.
For safety reasons, withdraw key
from steering lock. Remove block-
age.
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position 1,
set the wiper switch to the next
highest wiper speed.
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
130
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Intermittent wiping
Windshield wipers without rain sensor*
At speeds of approximately 105 mph
(170 km/h) the wiper switches automati-
cally to continuous wiping. Always obey lo-
cal speed limits.
Windshield wipers with rain sensor*
A rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers depending on how wet
the windshield is.
Switch on ignition.
Set the wiper switch to position 1
(page 49).
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor which monitors the wetness of
windshield.
i
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened.
i
When intermittent wiping is on and the
key is turned from position 1 to
position 2 in the steering lock
(page 33), and kept in that position
for longer than two seconds, the wipe
interval will be set to approximately
five seconds.
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
mittent setting when the vehicle is tak-
en to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper-
ate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
The switch should not be left in inter-
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the en-
gine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry wind-
shield.
131
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Headlamp cleaning system*
The button is located on the right side of
the dashboard.
Headlamp washer button
Switch on ignition.
Briefly press the upper part of button.
The headlamps will be cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
Information on filling up the washer reser-
voir can be found in the “Operation” sec-
tion (page 224).
Rear window wiper
The rear window wiper will also automati-
cally engage if the windshield wiper is en-
gaged and the gear selector lever is placed
in reverse.
Rear window wiper with rain sensor*
Rear window wiper intervals are controlled
automatically according to the amount of
water on the windshield and the speed of
the vehicle, if:
rear window wiper is switched on
front windshield wipers are switched to
intermittent wiping
The interval for the rear window wiper re-
mains constant when the windshield wiper
interval is ten seconds or more.
132
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visor
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
1Mirror cover
2Mounting
Swing sun visors down when you expe-
rience glare.
To use mirror, lift cover 1 up.
Illuminated vanity mirrors
Turn the key in steering lock to
position 1 (page 33).
Lift cover up.
The lamp switches on.
Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
i
If sunlight enters through a side win-
dow, disengage sun visor from
mounting 2 and pivot to the side.
133
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated
after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of
operation depending on the outside tem-
perature.
Activating
Switch ignition on.
Press button F (page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
Press button F again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning! G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driv-
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operat-
ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
cient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster au-
tomatically turns itself back on.
134
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control
135
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control panel in the front
Item
1Thumbwheel for center air vent
2Center air vent, adjustable
3Defroster air vent windshield
4Thumbwheels for side air vent
5Side air vent, adjustable
6Footwell air vent
7Automatic climate control
Item
1Air volume control
2Defrosting
3Air recirculation
4Temperature control
5Automatic control (temperature, air
distribution, air volume)
6AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
Residual heat / ventilation (REST)
7Interior temperature sensor
8Air distribution control
9Rear window defroster
aRear passenger compartment venti-
lation on/off
136
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is operatio-
nal whenever the engine is running. You
can operate the climate control system in
either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depend-
ing on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
Warning! G
When operating the automatic climate con-
trol, the air that enters the passenger com-
partment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (de-
pending on the set temperature). This may
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between un-
protected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
(page 138).
Warning! G
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
tion) may require replacement of the fil-
ter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not touch the interior temperature
sensor to maintain a precise tempera-
ture.
The set value is indicated by a lighted
segment on the control wheels.
137
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic mode
Switching on
Briefly press button U
(page 135).
The indicator lamp comes on. The tem-
perature, air volume and distribution
are controlled automatically.
Adjust the temperature with the tem-
perature control 4 (page 135).
Temperature control is switched off in
the extreme position (blue or red dot).
Switching off
Briefly press button U
(page 135).
The indicator lamp goes out. The auto-
matic mode is switched off.
Air volume control 1 is set to fan
speed 2 and air distribution is set
to V.
Activating basic setting
Press button U at least
three seconds.
All functions are switched to automatic
mode and temperature is set to 72°F
(22°C).
Changing basic setting
Set temperature control 4
(page 135) to desired temperature.
Press button U for ten seconds.
The selected temperature value is
stored and set.
Adjusting air volume and air distribu-
tion manually
Adjusting air volume
Turn air volume control 1 to one of
five air volume settings.
i
Adjust temperature settings in small
increments.
i
If you turn air volume control 1 or air
distribution control 8 (page 135),
the automatic mode switches off. The
indicator lamp in the button U goes
out. The temperature control will still
be in automatic mode.
i
When set to 0 the system is fully deac-
tivated and no fresh air is supplied. This
setting should only be selected for
short periods of time.
138
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution
Turn air distribution control 8
(page 135) to one the following
symbols:
Windshield fogged on the outside
Switch the windshield wipers on,
(page 50).
Turn air distribution control 8 to h
or k.
Defrosting
Activating
Press button P (page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
Press button P again.
or
Press button U (page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button P
goes out.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Symbol Function
hDirects air to the center
and side air vents
jDirects air to the wind-
shield and side air vents
VDirects air into the en-
tire vehicle interior
kDirects air to the foot-
wells and side air vents
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
When the defrost setting has been se-
lected, only the rear window defroster
can be switched on. No other settings
are possible. Warning! G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
139
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating
Press button Ä (page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
Press button Ä (page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
tioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehi-
cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu-
midified.
Press button ° (page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button °
comes on.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
ing.
Press button ° again.
The indicator lamp on the button °
goes out.
The air conditioning system uses the refrig-
erant R-134a. This refrigerant is free of
CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.
i
To achieve the fastest possible cooling
of the interior, the automatic climate
control automatically switches to air
recirculation. The indicator lamp in the
button Ä is not illuminated when
the system automatically switches to
air recirculation.
i
The air recirculation mode is
deactivated automatically
after 30 minutes if the automatic
climate control is switched on
after five minutes if the air condi-
tioning is switched off
after five minutes if the outside
temperature is above approximate-
ly 45°F (7°C)
i
Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
140
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 0 or 1 (page 33).
Press button ° (page 135).
The indicator lamp on button °
comes on.
Deactivating
Press button °.
The indicator lamp on button °
goes out.
!
If the °button on the automatic
climate control panel starts to flash,
this indicates that the air conditioning
system is losing refrigerant. The com-
pressor has turned itself off. The air
conditioning cannot be turned on
again.
Have the air conditioning system
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
i
How long the system will provide heat-
ing depends on the coolant tempera-
ture and the temperature set in the
climate control. The blower will run at
lower speed regardless of the air vol-
ume control setting.
i
The residual heat is automatically
turned off:
when the ignition is switched on
after about 30 minutes
if the coolant temperature is too
low
if the battery voltage drops
141
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment ventila-
tion and rear automatic climate control
Deactivating
For an improved cooling or heating output
in the front passenger compartment, you
can switch off the rear passenger compart-
ment ventilation.
Press button § (page 135).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The operation of the rear automatic
climate control and the fresh air supply
to the rear compartment is shut off.
Activating
Press button § again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The rear automatic climate control
switches to automatic mode and fresh
air enters the rear compartment.
Automatic mode
The automatic climate control panel for the
rear is located on the rear center console.
1Air volume control
2Air distribution control
3Automatic control (air distribution, air
volume)
Press button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The automatic climate control cools or
heats the interior depending on the
temperature selected on the front
climate control unit.
Adjusting air volume and air distribu-
tion manually
Adjusting air volume
Press upper part of button R.
The blower setting is increased each
time the button is pressed.
Press lower part of button R.
The blower setting is decreased each
time the button is pressed.
i
When the air volume or air distribution
control is pressed, the automatic mode
is switched off. The indicator lamp in
button U is turned off. Temperature
setting remains in automatic mode.
컄컄
142
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution
Press upper part of button Ô.
Air is directed upwards.
Press lower part of button Ó.
Air is directed to the footwell.
Front and rear air vents
Adjusting side air vents
Turn thumbwheel 4 (page 135) to
one of the following positions:
!
When in manual mode, the rear blower
setting cannot be increased beyond
the setting for the front blower setting.
For example, if the driver or front pas-
senger changes the blower setting to
level 3, the rear blower will not go high-
er than level 3 as well.
i
For draft-free ventilation, adjust the air
vents upwards.
To allow unrestricted operation of the
automatic climate control, the air vents
should remain open.
Symbol Function
hOpen
l Ventilation of side
windows in area of
exterior mirror
MClosed
컄컄
143
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Center air vents
Opening
Turn thumbwheel for center air vent 1
(page 135) upward to position h.
Closing
Turn thumbwheel for center air vent 1
downward to position M.
Use the left thumbwheel to adjust the cen-
ter air vents on the left and in the center.
Use the right thumbwheel to adjust the
right center air vent.
Rear passenger compartment air vents
1Left center air vent, adjustable
2 Right center air vent, adjustable
i
The temperature at the air vents for the
rear passenger compartment is the
same as at the dashboard center air
vents.
144
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the side windows
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the passenger door and on the rear cen-
ter console.
1Left front window
2Right front window
3Right rear window
4Left rear window
5Rear window override switch
(page 73).
Additional switches for the rear windows
are located on the rear center console.
6Left rear window
7Right rear window
Turn key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2.
Warning! G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be im-
mediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pressed past the resistance
point and released, by pressing the respec-
tive switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pressed the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pressing the
switch and holding it there, the automatic
reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock your ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
145
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening the windows
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol k to the resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the windows
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol j to the resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol k past the resistance point
and release.
The corresponding window opens com-
pletely.
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
Press switch 1 to 4 at symbol j
past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes com-
pletely. Stopping windows
Press respective switch again.
Warning G
If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
ing the window, and upward movement of
the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fin-
gers, etc., the automatic reversal will not op-
erate.
!
If the upward movement of the window
is blocked during the closing proce-
dure, the window will stop and open
slightly.
Remove the obstruction, press the
switch j again past the resistance
point and release.
If the window still does not close when
there is no obstruction, then hold the
switch j down. The side window
will then close without the obstruction
sensor function.
Warning! G
Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds switch j is again
pressed past the resistance point and
released, the automatic reversal will not
operate.
146
Controls in detail
Power windows
Synchronizing power windows
The power window must be resynchroni-
zed each time
after the battery has been discon-
nected.
if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed (Ex-
press-close).
Synchronizing the power windows
Switch on ignition.
Press the power window switches at
the symbol j until the side win-
dows are closed.
Hold the switches for approximately
one second.
The power window are synchronized.
Rear quarter windows*
The switches are on the upper part of the
center console.
1Left side
2Right side
Turn key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2.
Opening the windows
Press and hold the upper part of
switches 1 or 2.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Warning! G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure. The closing of the
windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the switch.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the steering lock, and lock the ve-
hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
ous personal injury.
147
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing the windows
Press and hold the lower part of
switches 1 or 2.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
148
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
and closed electrically. The switch for the
sliding/pop-roof is on the overhead
control panel.
1Push up to raise roof at rear
2Push back to slide roof open
3Push down to lower roof at rear
4Push forward to slide roof closed
With the roof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
roof open, the screen will also retract.
Warning! G
When closing the sliding/ pop-up roof, make
sure that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The closing procedure can be immediately
reversed by moving the switch in
direction 1 or 2.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from steering lock and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the
sliding/pop-up roof.
Do not open the sliding /pop-up roof if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
could result in malfunctions.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (page 265).
149
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 1 or 2 (page 33).
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof
To open, close, raise or lower the
sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
in the required direction 1to 4.
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the desired position.
Raising the roof
Press and hold the switch in
direction 1.
The roof is raised at rear.
Lowering the roof
Pull and hold the switch in direction 3.
The sliding/ pop-up roof is lowered and
closed.
Opening the sliding/pop-up roof auto-
matically
Briefly press switch in direction 2.
The sliding/pop up roof will not open
completely.
Press switch again to open the
sliding/pop-up roof completely.
Stopping the roof
Briefly press the switch in any direc-
tion.
The movement of the roof will stop.
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof
The power sliding/pop-up roof must be re-
synchronized each time after:
the battery has been disconnected
the sliding/pop-up roof has been
closed manually
the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
smoothly
a malfunction
Synchronizing
Remove the fuse from the fuse box
(page 287).
Replace the fuse in the fuse box.
Switch on ignition.
Press and hold the switch in
direction 1 until the sliding/pop-up
roof is fully raised at the rear.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
The sliding/pop-up roof is synchro-
nized.
150
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de-
scribed on the following pages:
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed.
Parktronic*, with which you can assist
your parking maneuvers.
The driving systems BAS, ABS, ESP, EBB
and 4-ETS, are described in the “Safety
and Security” section (page 76).
Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km /h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column (page 23).
Warning! G
Cruise control is a convenience system de-
signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
eration. The driver is and must remain
responsible for the vehicle speed and for
safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
151
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1Set current or higher speed
2Set current or lower speed
3Cancel cruise control
4Resume at last set speed
Setting current speed
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
Step on the brake pedal.
or
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
i
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
!
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear se-
lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
152
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the de-
sired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Setting a lower speed
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
1 km/h) increments
Faster
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
Slower
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
Setting to last stored speed (“Resume”
function)
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
Cruise control will resume the last set
speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Transmission in LOW RANGE mode
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate the cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
i
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will au-
tomatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehi-
cle sufficiently.
Warning! G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
ous injury to you and others.
i
The cruise control should not be used
during off-road driving.
153
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system* (Parking assist)
The Parktronic system assists the driver
during parking maneuvers. It visually and
audibly indicates the distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
With the ignition on, the Parktronic system
engages automatically at speeds up to ap-
proximately 10 mph (15 km/h) and deac-
tivates during higher speeds.
Parktronic system monitors your vehicle’s
environment by means of six sensors in
the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
1Sensors located in front bumper
Warning! G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to nor does it replace the need
for extreme care. The responsibility during
parking and other critical maneuvers rests
always with the driver.
Make sure that no persons or animals are lo-
cated in the area in which your are maneu-
vering. They could otherwise be injured.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or
street curbs). Such objects may not be de-
tected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors, es-
pecially at times of snow and ice. For notes
on cleaning the Parktronic system sensors
(page 237).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
nals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be tak-
en into consideration.
154
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Monitoring reach of sensors
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
snow or they will be unable to function
properly. Clean the sensors regularly with-
out scratching or damaging them.
Front sensors
Rear sensors
Minimum distance
When an obstacle is located in this area, all
warning displays will light up and a warning
tone will sound. If the vehicle moves closer
than the minimum distance to an object,
the distance may no longer be displayed.
Center approx. 39 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Center approx. 47 in (120 cm)
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
i
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The Parktro-
nic system will not detect such objects
at close range and damage to your ve-
hicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc-
es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackham-
mers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
155
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
The warning indicators show the distance
between the sensor and the obstacle. The
warning indicators for the front area are lo-
cated above the center air vents in the
dashboard. The warning indicator for the
rear area is located in the rear passenger
compartment lamp.
1Segments, left side of vehicle
2Segments, right side of vehicle
Each warning indicator has six yellow and
two red segments.
The gear selector lever position deter-
mines which warning indicator is activat-
ed.
As soon as the sensors detect an obstacle,
one or more segments light up, depending
on the distance. An intermittent acoustic
warning will also sound as the seventh seg-
ment comes on and a constant acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of
three seconds will sound for the eighth
segment.
Selector lever
position
Warning indicator
D, R, N, PFront area activated
RRear area activated
!
If all red segments light up in the warn-
ing indicators, a dirty sensor or a ultra-
sonic signal could be the reason.
Clean the sensors (page 237).
After cleaning the sensors, switch
the ignition on.
156
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching Parktronic system on/off
You can switch Parktronic system off
manually.
The switch is located on the lower part of
the center console.
1Parktronic off
2Indicator lamp
3Parktronic on
Switching Parktronic off
Press switch on the upper part 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Switching Parktronic on
Press switch on the upper part 3.
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
!
If the Parktronic system is malfunction-
ing, all red segments of the warning in-
dicators light up and an additional
warning sounds.
Contact your Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible.
i
If you switch the ignition on, the
Parktronic system will be automatically
switched on.
The rear Parktronic sensors will not au-
tomatically disengage when towing a
trailer. Therefore switch the Parktronic
system off.
157
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Loading instructions
The gross vehicle weight which is the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,
spare wheel, installed accessories, pas-
sengers and luggage/cargo must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) for your vehicle. In addition, the
load must be distributed in such a way so
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axle. The GVWR and
GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on the
certification label which can be found on
the left door pillar.
The handling characteristics of a fully load-
ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Please pay attention to and comply with
the following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
Always place items being carried
against front or rear seat backrests,
and fasten them as securely as possi-
ble.
The heaviest portion of the cargo
should always be kept as low as possi-
ble against front or rear seat backrests.
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
fastening materials appropriate for the
weight and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, always use parti-
tion net when transporting cargo.
Never drive vehicle with the liftgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon-
sciousness and death.
158
Controls in detail
Loading
For additional safety when transporting
cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied,
fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into
the opposite side buckles.
Cargo tie-down rings
The cargo area is provided with four
tie-down rings. Additional two rings are lo-
cated at the rear of front seats.
Cargo tie-down ring
Carefully secure cargo by applying even
load on all rings with rope of sufficient
strength to hold down the cargo.
i
The cargo area is the preferred place to
carry objects. The enlarged cargo area
should only be used for items which do
not fit in the cargo area alone.
i
While the partition net* (page 159)
will help protect you from smaller ob-
jects, it cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the pas-
senger area in an accident. Such items
must be properly secured using the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo area
floor.
159
Controls in detail
Loading
Hooks
Four hooks located on the rear compart-
ment trim panels, two on each side.
Hooks
Use the hooks to secure light weight items.
The maximum permissible weight per hook
is 9 lbs (4 kg).
Partition net* Use of the partition net is a particularly im-
portant safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat
backrests with smaller objects.
The partition net can be installed behind
the backrests of the front or rear seats.
Engaging partition net
1Holder
2Mounting hook
Warning! G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-
sengers, or cargo is being carried behind the
seat bench.
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
objects flying in the occupant area during a
collision or sudden maneuver, always use
partition net when transporting cargo.
The partition net cannot prevent the move-
ment of large, heavier objects into the pas-
senger area in an accident. Such items must
be properly secured using the cargo
tie-down rings in the cargo area floor
(page 158).
Passenger use of seats behind installed par-
tition net is restricted because of the foot-
well being taken up by the net.
160
Controls in detail
Loading
One after the other, press the two
mounting hooks 2 inward against the
spring pressure and turn them.
The mounting hooks are locked in this
position and you can move the net into
position more easily.
Turn one of the mounting hooks 2 in
the opposite direction.
The spring pressure will push it out.
Engage mounting hook 2 in
holder 1.
Turn the other mounting hook and en-
gage it in the opposite holder.
Push both mounting hooks 2 forward
into holder 1.
Tightening partition net
Installation behind the front seats
1Tie-down hook
2Ring
Installation behind the rear seats
1Tie-down hook
2Ring
3Tensioner
Insert tie-down hook 1 in rings 2.
Pull on loose ends of tie-down straps
until net is tight.
After driving a short distance, check
the tension on the net and retighten if
necessary.
i
Before tightening the partition net,
remove the cargo floor plates
(page 162).
161
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing partition net
Lift tensioner 3 upward to a horizon-
tal position to release tensioning of the
strap.
Disengage tie-down hooks 1 from
rings 2.
Remove mounting hooks 2
(page 159) from holder 1
(page 159).
Roll up and close the partition net.
Store partition net behind rear seat
bench.
Cargo area cover blind*
1Handle
2Holder
Closing blind
Pull blind on handle 1 across the car-
go area.
Guide blind into holders 2.
Opening blind
Disengage blind and guide retraction
by its handle.
Removing blind
3Button
4Mounting sleeve
Roll the blind up.
Push mounting sleeve 4 inward
against spring pressure until it engag-
es.
Remove blind from mounts.
Warning! G
Passenger use of third row seats with cargo
area cover blind installed is restricted.
162
Controls in detail
Loading
Installing blind
Place left side of blind in left mount.
Position right side of blind over right
mount.
Push button 3, releasing mounting
sleeve to slide into mount.
Cargo floor plates
Removing cargo floor plates
Lift cargo floor plate at rear edge
(arrow).
Cargo floor plate unhinges automati-
cally.
Remove cargo floor plate by pulling it
rearwards.
Storing cargo floor plates
1Hook and loop strip
Fold the left cargo floor plate together.
Open the hook and loop strip at the
bottom of backrest of the third row
seats* and insert cargo floor plate.
Close the hook and loop strip.
i
Before you can remove the cargo floor
plates, it is possible that the third row
seats* (page 102) must be removed.
163
Controls in detail
Loading
Installing cargo floor plates
1Opening
2Pins
3Attachment opening
4Latch
Grip into opening 1 and guide pins 2
into attachment opening 3.
The center pin must snap into place in
latch 4.
Roof rack*
Roof rails
For further information, inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Warning! G
Take into consideration that when the roof
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
The maximum roof load when using roof
rack systems is 220 lbs (100 kg).
!
Attach roof racks to the roof rails only.
Use only those roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Follow manufacturer’s installation in-
structions.
The vehicle could otherwise be dam-
aged.
164
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces Glove box
1Glove box lid release
2Glove box lid
Opening the glove box
Grab in recess and pull lid release 1.
The glove box lid 2 opens downward.
Closing the glove box
Push glove box lid up to close.
Storage compartment under front
passenger seat*
The storage compartment is lockable with
its separate key.
1Lock cylinder
2Handle
Locking and unlocking the storage com-
partment
Turn the key clockwise.
The storage compartment is locked.
Turn the key counterclockwise.
The storage compartment is unlocked.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
Always use partition net when transporting
cargo. Partition net cannot secure hard or
heavy objects.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob-
jects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
i
The opened glove box is illuminated
with the key in steering lock position 1
(page 33).
165
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the storage compartment
Press the lock cylinder in and pull stor-
age compartment out using handle 2.
Closing the storage compartment
Push the storage compartment in until
the lock engages.
Armrest storage spaces
A flat storage tray with a deeper storage
compartment underneath is located below
the armrest. Both can be opened separate-
ly.
1Button to open storage tray
2Button to open storage compartment
3Open cover
4Storage tray
5Coin holder
Opening the storage tray
Press button 1 and lift up armrest.
The armrest contains two coin holders.
Opening the storage compartment
Press button 2 and lift up armrest.
166
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the storage compartment in
front of armrest
Slide the cover 3 rearward.
The storage compartment below con-
tains a cup holder (page 167).
Cup holders Cup holder in instrument panel
A cup holder is located on both the right
and left side of the instrument panel.
Opening the cup holder
Briefly touch top of cover.
The cup holder opens automatically.
Closing the cup holder
Fold the cup holder upwards and press
on it until it engages.
Warning! G
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
167
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in front of armrest
Opening the cup holder
Slide cover rearward (page 166).
Fold the cup holder forward.
Closing the cup holder
Fold the cup holder backward.
Slide cover forward.
Cup holder in rear center console
Opening the cup holder
Briefly touch the cover.
The cup holder opens automatically.
Closing the cup holder
Press the cup holder forward and press
on it until it engages.
Armrest in rear seat bench
Pull the armrest down by its top.
!
Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat bench.
168
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtrays and cigarette lighter Ashtray and cigarette lighter in the
front center console
1Ashtray
2Cigarette lighter
3Cover plate
Opening the ashtray
Briefly touch cover plate 3.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
Secure vehicle from movement by set-
ting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
Grip the insert on the sides and pull it
out upwards.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
Install ashtray insert.
Close the ashtray.
Warning! G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
Hold the knob only.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
key from the steering lock. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac-
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an ac-
cident and/or serious personal injury.
i
The cigarette lighter socket can be
used to accommodate electrical acces-
sories up to a maximum of 50 W.
If the engine is off, the battery may be-
come discharged when used for long
periods of time.
Warning! G
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
from movement. Move gear selector lever to
position N. With gear selector lever in
position N, turn off the engine.
169
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter
Switch on the ignition.
Push in cigarette lighter 2
(page 168).
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-
matically when hot.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter in the rear
center console 1Ashtray
2Cigarette lighter
3Cover plate
Opening the ashtray
Briefly touch cover plate 3.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
Grip the insert on the sides and pull it
out upwards.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
Install ashtray insert.
Close the ashtray.
Cigarette lighter
Switch on the ignition.
Push in cigarette lighter 2.
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-
matically when hot.
!
Close the ashtray in the rear center
console before folding the rear seat
bench.
170
Controls in detail
Useful features
Electrical outlet
Electrical outlet
One outlet is located in the front passen-
ger footwell and another on the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment.
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigarette lighter type).
Telephone*
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for information on the installation of an ap-
proved external antenna. Refer to the radio
transmitter operation instructions regard-
ing use of an external antenna.
i
The outlets function even if the key is
not in the ignition.
The electrical outlet can be used to
accommodate electrical consumers
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a
maximum of 180 W.
If the engine is off, the battery may be-
come discharged if used for long peri-
ods of time.
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and /or serious
personal injury.
171
Controls in detail
Useful features
You can take and place telephone calls
using the MCS unit.
See separate instruction manual for infor-
mation on how to operate the telephone.
Tele Aid*
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his /her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
phone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the MCS (Modular Control Sys-
tem)1 if road, weather and traffic conditions
permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (ap-
proximately 13.5 m) every second.
1Observe all legal requirements
Warning! G
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
hicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an-
swering or placing a call.
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
tem may only be performed by com-
pleting the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning key
in steering lock to position 2
(page 33) and the message
TELE
AID NOT ACTIVATED
will be shown in
the MCS display for approximately
10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding ac-
tivation, please call the Response Cen-
ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
172
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
automatic and manual emergency
roadside assistance and
information.
The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cel-
lular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted using the volume control on
the MCS unit.
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button or
the Information button ¡, depend-
ing on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your ac-
quaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, profile
and more.
System self-check
Initially, after turning the key in the steer-
ing lock to position 2, malfunctions are de-
tected and indicated (the indicator lamps
in the SOS button, the Roadside Assis-
tance button and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on). The mes-
sage
TELE AID - VISIT WORKSHOP
ap-
pears for approx. 10 seconds in the MCS
display.
i
The SOS button, the Roadside Assis-
tance button and the Information
button ¡ are located in the over-
head control panel.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
lites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the Tele
Aid system may not function and if this
occurs, assistance must be summoned
by other means.
173
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatical-
ly:
following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning detractors
(ETDs) or airbags deploy,
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm sys-
tem (page 83) and tow-away alarm
(page 84).
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
Warning! G
The Tele Aid control unit is located under
the front passenger seat. If there is accumu-
lation of water or other liquid in this area,
the Tele Aid control unit could suffer an
electrical short circuit making the system in-
operative. In this case the indicator lamp in
the SOS button will not illuminate during or
will remain illuminated after the system
self-check. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button do not come on dur-
ing the system self-check or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
red and/or the message
TELE AID -
VISIT WORKSHOP
is displayed in the MCS
display after the system self-check, a mal-
function in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as ex-
pected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
174
Controls in detail
Useful features
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message
EMERGENCY CALL –
CONNECTING CALL
appears in the MCS dis-
play. When the connection is established,
the message
EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED
appears in the MCS dis-
play. All information relevant to the emer-
gency, such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location
system), vehicle model, identification num-
ber and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon af-
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE
ap-
pears in the MCS display. The Response
Center will attempt to determine more pre-
cisely the nature of the accident provided
they can speak to an occupant of the vehi-
cle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
it has been activated and is operation-
al. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response cen-
ter.
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the re-
sponse center.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il-
luminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network is not available).
The message
EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED
appears in the MCS display
for approx. ten seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
175
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
1Cover
2SOS button
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
Roadside Assistance button
1Cover
2Roadside Assistance button
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
Press and hold the button 2 (for long-
er than two seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
ROADSIDE
ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL
will
appear in the MCS display.
Warning! G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
hicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
tion. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
pants.
176
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the
message
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL CONNECTED
appears in the MCS dis-
play. The Tele Aid system will transmit data
generating the vehicle identification num-
ber, model, color and location (subject to
availability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established the audio
system mutes and the message
TELE AID
– ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE
ap-
pears in the MCS display.
Describe the nature of the need for as-
sistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For
services such as labor and/or towing,
charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside
Assistance manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable,
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func-
tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road-
side Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actu-
al vehicle data.
i
While the call is connected you can
change to navigation menu by pressing
NAVI button on the MCS unit.
i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside As-
sistance button remains illumi-
nated in red for approx. ten seconds
during the system self-check after turn-
ing the key in the steering lock to
position 2 (together with the SOS but-
ton and the Information button ¡).
See system self-check (page 172)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately ten seconds.
177
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
1Cover
2Information button ¡
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
Press and hold the button (for longer
than two seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
ter will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message
INFO – CONNECTING CALL
will
appear in the MCS display.
When the connection is established, the
message
INFO – CALL CONNECTED
appears
in the MCS display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and lo-
cation (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
lished. When a voice connection is estab-
lished the audio system mutes and the
message
TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the MCS display. Information
regarding the operation of your vehicle, the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
or Mercedes-Benz USA products and ser-
vices is available to you.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center es-
tablished, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network was not available). The
message
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL FAILED
appears in the MCS dis-
play.
Roadside Assistance calls can be ter-
minated using the END Button on the
MCS unit.
i
While the call is connected, you can
change to navigation menu by pressing
NAVI button on the MCS unit.
178
Controls in detail
Useful features
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
arately) to learn more (USA only).
Upgrade signals
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority.
Automatic emergency – First priority
Manual emergency – Second priority
Roadside assistance – Third priority
Information – Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (al-
ternating) tone will be heard and the ap-
propriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identi-
fication number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to re-
transmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmis-
sion is completed. Once a call is conclud-
ed, a beep will be heard and the respective
indicator lamp will stop flashing. The MCS
system operation will resume.
i
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approx. 10 seconds during the sys-
tem self-check after turning key in the
steering lock to position 2 (together
with the SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button ).
See system self-check (page 172)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuous-
ly and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not avail-
able).
The message
INFO CALL FAILED
ap-
pears in the MCS display.
Information calls can be terminated us-
ing the END button on the MCS.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flash-
ing after pressing one of the buttons or
remains illuminated (in red) at any
time, the Tele Aid system has detected
a fault or the service is not currently ac-
tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter and have the system checked or
contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
179
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
tentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and no
other key is available:
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your pass-
word which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
Then return to your vehicle and pull
outside handle of the liftgate for mini-
mum of 20 seconds until the SOS but-
ton is flashing.
The message
EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED
appears in the MCS
display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
!
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
i
The indicator lamp on the correspond-
ing button flashes until the call is con-
cluded. Calls can only be terminated by
a Response Center or Customer Assis-
tance Center representative, except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
using the END button on the MCS unit.
i
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the MCS system audio is muted and
the selected mode (radio, tape or CD)
pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
installed) switches off. If you must use
this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place
the call. The navigation system (if en-
gaged) will continue to run. A pop-up
window will appear in the MCS display
to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in
progress.
180
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
Report the incident to the police
The police will issue a numbered inci-
dent report.
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele
Aid system. Once the vehicle is locat-
ed, the Response Center will contact
the local law enforcement and you. The
vehicle’s location will only be provided
to law enforcement.
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices, for example garage door openers,
gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink® or some other systems.
You can program the signal transmitter
buttons.
i
The remote door unlock feature is avail-
able if the relevant cellular phone net-
work is available.
The SOS button will flash and the mes-
sage
EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED
will appear in the MCS
display to indicate receipt of the door
unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a
Response Center specialist will at-
tempt to establish voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
If the outside liftgate handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pressing the outside
liftgate handle again.
181
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote control integrated into the
overhead control panel
1Hand-held remote control trans-
mitter (not part of the vehicle
equipment)
2Hand-held transmitter button
3,4,5 Signal transmitter button
6Indicator lamp
Warning! G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate op-
erator, make sure that people and objects
are out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage.
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down. When program-
ming a gate operator, the gate opens or
closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks safe-
ty stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience diffi-
culties with programming the transmit-
ter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
182
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the in-
tegrated remote control
Step 1:
Switch on ignition.
Step 2:
If you have previously programmed an
integrated signal transmitter button
and wish to retain its programming,
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
ter buttons 3 and 5 and release
them only when the indicator light be-
gins to flash after approximately 20
seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
dure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held trans-
mitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
Step 3:
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control transmitter 1 of the device
you wish to train approximately 2 to
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control locat-
ed on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 6 in view.
Step 4:
Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held transmitter
button 2 and the desired integrated
signal transmitter button (3, 4
or 5). Do not release the buttons until
completing step 5.
The indicator lamp 6 on the integrat-
ed remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
i
For operation in the USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
183
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 5:
When the indicator lamp 6 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons.
Step 6:
Press and hold the just-trained inte-
grated signal transmitter button and
observe the indicator lamp 6.
If the indicator lamp 6 stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete and
your device should activate when the
integrated signal transmitter button is
pressed and released.
Step 7:
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other roll-
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea-
ture, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the “train-
ing” button may also be referred to as
“learn”or “smart” button. If there is dif-
ficulty locating the transmitting button,
refer to the garage door opener opera-
tor’s manual.
i
The indicator lamp 6 flashes the first
time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp
will only start flashing after 20 sec-
onds.
i
If the indicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly
for about two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with pro-
gramming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
컄컄
184
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 9:
Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
ing step.
Step 10:
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (3, 4
or 5).
Step 11:
Press, hold for two seconds and re-
lease same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
Step 12:
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (3, 4
or 5).
Step 13:
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the inte-
grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig-
nal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having dif-
ficulties programming a gate operator (re-
gardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
컄컄
185
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 4:
Continue to press and hold the inte-
grated signal transmitter button (3,
4 or 5) while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your hand-held remote con-
trol transmitter 1 every two seconds
until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 6 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Operation of remote control
Switch on ignition.
Select and press the appropriate inte-
grated signal transmitter button (3,
4or 5 to activate the remote con-
trolled device.
The integrated remote control trans-
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the remote control memory
Switch on ignition.
Simultaneously hold down the signal
transmitter buttons 3 and 5, for ap-
proximately 20 seconds, or until the in-
dicator lamp 6 flashes rapidly. Do not
hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
Reprogramming a single integrated
signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal trans-
mitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
Press and hold the desired signal trans-
mitter button (3, 4 or 5). Do not re-
lease the button.
The indicator lamp will begin to flash af-
ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
186
Controls in detail
Useful features
Trip computer*
The trip computer is located in the
overhead console.
1RESET
2MODE
3Display
Switching on the trip computer
Switch on ignition.
Display 3 shows one of the available
functions.
If a function display does not appear,
press MODE 2.
Selecting functions
Press MODE 2 repeatedly until the
desired display appears.
The functions are displayed in the follow-
ing order:
Date
Compass
Stop watch
Present fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Distance remaining
Country
Switching off trip computer
Setting the date
Press MODE 2 repeatedly until the
date appears.
Press RESET 1.
The month shown flashes.
Press MODE 2 to advance to selected
month.
Press RESET 1.
The day shown flashes.
Press MODE 2 to advance to selected
day.
Press RESET 1.
The year shown flashes.
Press MODE 2 to advance to selected
year.
Press RESET 1.
The display stops flashing and the date
is set.
i
With engine not running, the display
switches off automatically 30 seconds
after the last entry.
187
Controls in detail
Useful features
Compass
The compass displays the direction the ve-
hicle is traveling. The display 3 will show
you N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
To ensure the display is correct, the com-
pass must be set to the proper geographic
zone (page 188). It may also be neces-
sary to calibrate the compass
(page 188).
Zone map North America Zone map South America
i
The presence of buildings, bridges,
power lines and large antenna masts
can influence the displayed values. Me-
tallic or magnetic objects in or on the
vehicle can influence the accuracy of
the compass.
188
Controls in detail
Useful features
Setting the compass zone
Determine the geographical point of
the vehicle with the aid of the zone
maps.
Switch on the ignition.
Press MODE 2 (page 186) repeat-
edly until the compass display appears
in the trip computer display 3.
Press RESET 1 (page 186) to select
the compass zone mode.
The zone selected last is shown in the
display.
Press RESET 1 repeatedly until the
correct compass zone, as determined
from the zone map, is shown in the dis-
play.
Press MODE 2 twice.
The new compass zone is activated and
the compass display will be shown.
Calibrating the compass
If the vehicle was exposed to a significant
magnetic zone, such as high voltage power
lines, the compass may have to be calibrat-
ed.
To calibrate the compass correctly, ob-
serve the following:
Calibrate the compass in an area free
of steel superstructures and power
lines.
Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
exterior lamps, climate control, rear
window defroster etc.).
Do not open or close the
sliding/pop-up roof.
Close doors and liftgate.
Start and run the engine.
Press MODE 2 (page 186) repeat-
edly until the compass display appears
in the trip computer display 3.
Press RESET 1 and afterwards press
MODE 2.
In the display appears
CAL–
.
Press and hold RESET 1 for approxi-
mately two seconds.
The calibration mode is activated and
the display shows
CAL
.
Drive without interruption two full cir-
cles at a speed between 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 7 mph (10 km/h).
The message
CAL
goes out after a short
time. The calibration is now complete.
i
An open liftgate triggers the
display
---
.
189
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stop watch
Press MODE 2 (page 186) repeat-
edly until the stop watch display ap-
pears in the trip computer display 3.
Counting
Press RESET 1 (page 186) to start
counting.
Stopping
Press RESET 1 again to stop counting.
Resetting
Press and hold RESET 1 until the dis-
play shows “0:00”.
Average fuel consumption
Press MODE 2 (page 186) repeat-
edly until the average fuel consumption
display appears in the trip computer
display 3.
Distance remaining with fuel presently
in tank
Press MODE 2 (page 186) repeat-
edly until the distance remaining dis-
play appears in the trip computer
display 3.
i
If
CAL
remains in the display, calibration
was not successfully completed. You
have to recalibrate:
Remove the key from the steering
lock.
Start the vehicle and start the cali-
bration procedure described previ-
ously.
We recommend that you have the com-
pass calibrated at a Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
i
When the fuel supply drops to reserve
level the display flashes distance re-
maining.
USA only:
The display alternates between
FUEL
and distance remaining until
supply is consistently below the re-
serve level. When the fuel supply is
very low [approximately 1.5 gal
(5.5 l)]
FUEL
is displayed
continuously.
190
Controls in detail
Useful features
Country
Press MODE 2 (page 186) repeat-
edly until the country display appears
in the trip computer display 3.
Press and hold RESET 1 a minimum of
five seconds to change the country unit
system.
Canada units system selection
You can choose between CAN-English or
CAN-French.
Setting CAN-English
Press RESET 1 repeatedly until CAN is
displayed.
Press MODE 2 to select
–ENG
.
Press MODE 2 again to set CAN-En-
glish.
Setting CAN-French
Press RESET 1 repeatedly until CAN is
displayed.
Press MODE 2.
–ENG
is displayed.
Press RESET 1 to select
–Fr
.
Press MODE 2 to set CAN-French.
The language selected determines how the
various displays are presented, see table.
Display Language Date Cardinal points Fuel consumption Distance remaining
GEr German DD.MM Süd, Nord, Ost, West l/100 km Kilometer
GB English MM.DD South, North, East, West mi/gal (Imperial) Miles
ESP Spain DD.MM Sur, Norte, Este, Oeste l/100 km Kilometer
Fr French DD.MM Sud, Nord, Est, Ouest l/100 km Kilometer
USA American MM.DD South, North, East, West mi/gal (US) Miles
CAN-ENG American MM.DD South, North, East, West l/100 km Kilometer
CAN-Fr French DD.MM Sud, Nord, Est, Ouest l/100 km Kilometer
GEr German DD.MM Süd, Nord, Ost, West l/100 km Kilometer
191
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
192
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find de-
tailed information on operating, maintain-
ing and caring for your vehicle.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satis-
fied you will be with its performance later
on.
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive en-
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of max-
imum rpm in each gear).
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when the
first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the en-
gine, the transfer case, the front differen-
tial or the rear differential has been
replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
193
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-
pends on driving habits and operating con-
ditions.
To save fuel you should:
Keep tires at the recommended infla-
tion pressures
Remove unnecessary loads
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use
Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
eration
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet and as required by the FSS.
Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
Drinking and driving Pedals
Power assistance
Warning! G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are a very dangerous combina-
tion. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
cident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning! G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
Warning! G
With the engine is not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
hicle.
194
Operation
Driving instructions
Brakes
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only sub-
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
ter stays on and there is no audible warn-
ing (EBP), the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
ervoir.
Have the brake system inspected immedi-
ately. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Warning! G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through wa-
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
!
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (page 78).
195
Operation
Driving instructions
Install only brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the oper-
ating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex-
tended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps
prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
196
Operation
Driving instructions
Parking Tires
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
mately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
!
Set the parking brake whenever park-
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
When parking on hills, always turn front
wheels towards the curb.
Warning! G
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle powertrain, as a re-
sult of vehicle/ trailer movement, always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
Shift gear selector lever to position N.
Have a second person place wheel
chocks on downhill side of left and right
trailer wheels.
Slowly release brake pedal and let vehi-
cle and trailer roll into chocks until
stopped.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move gear selector lever to position P.
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
Warning! G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
197
Operation
Driving instructions
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Specified tire pressures must be main-
tained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water on
the road, hydroplaning may occur even at
low speeds and with new tires. Reduce ve-
hicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance as compared with sum-
mer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still consid-
erably greater than when the road is not
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro-
priate caution.
Warning! G
Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the tread wear indicators (TWI) be-
come visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al-
low your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning! G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
198
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
ing conditions.
ML 350
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
ML 500
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“V”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 149 mph (240 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
rective steering action.
!
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
mum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
injury and possible death, for you and for
others.
i
For information on speed ratings for
winter tires, see “Winter tires”
(page 230).
i
For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains”
(page 231).
199
Operation
Driving instructions
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal brake effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
ter driving is resumed.
For more information, see "Winter driving"
(page 230).
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of control loss.
Do not engage the transfer case in position
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At
speeds below 18 mph (30 km / h) vehicle
steering is adversely affected by the LOW
RANGE - ABS (page 77).
Warning! G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking ma-
neuvers.
Warning! G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
terior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
hicle not facing the wind.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
200
Operation
Driving instructions
Standing water Off-road driving
Read this chapter carefully before you be-
gin off-road travel.
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle char-
acteristics and gear changing before you
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driv-
ing. We recommend that you start out with
easy off-road travel.
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
ment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing wa-
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake, causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
age is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
make it easier to recognize unexpected ob-
stacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehi-
cle cannot complete the attempted climb,
back it down in reverse gear.
Do not drive along the side of a slope (dan-
ger of vehicle rollover). The vehicle might
otherwise rollover. If in doing so the vehicle
begins to show a tendency to roll, immedi-
ately steer into a line of gravity (straight up
or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you
use only the service brake.
Warning! G
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
friction property can cause exceptional wear
and tear as well as brake failure.
Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up
and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that
full braking power may not be available in an
emergency.
201
Operation
Driving instructions
Special driving features for off-road
driving
The following driving features are available
for specific kind of operation:
LOW RANGE mode (page 125)
LOW RANGE – ABS (page 77)
LOW RANGE – 4-ETS (page 80)
LOW RANGE – ESP (page 81)
Off-road driving rules
Engage the LOW RANGE mode before driv-
ing under off-road conditions
(page 125).
Fasten items being carried as securely as
possible (page 157).
Checklist before off-road driving
Tires
Check the tread depth and maintain
specified tire pressure (see tire pres-
sure label inside the fuel filler flap).
Check tires for possible damage and
remove foreign objects.
Replace missing valve caps.
i
We recommend keeping doors, liftgate,
windows, and sliding/pop-up roof*
closed whenever driving in off-road
mode.
!
Observe the following during off-road
driving:
Adjust vehicle speed to condition of
terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
steeper the terrain, the lower the
speed should be
Watch out for obstacles, such as
rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.
Be especially careful when driving
in unknown territory. It may be nec-
essary to get out of the vehicle and
scout the path you intend to take.
Before driving through water, deter-
mine is depth.
Do not stop vehicle while immersed
in water, and do not shut off the
engine.
In sandy soil, please drive at a
steady speed as allowed by condi-
tions. This helps overcome the vehi-
cle rolling resistance and reduces
the likelihood of the vehicle sinking
into the ground.
Do not initiate jumps with the vehi-
cle. It interrupts the forward mo-
mentum of the vehicle.
Always drive onto slopes with the
the engine running and the vehicle
in gear.
202
Operation
Driving instructions
Rims
Dented or bent rims can cause tire
pressure loss and damage the tire
beads. For this reason, check and, if
necessary, change rims before driving
off-road.
Vehicle tool kit
Check if the vehicle jack is functional.
In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small
plank (to put under the vehicle jack on
sandy soil) with you.
Driving in steep terrain
Slope angle
1 25°
226°
Switch to LOW RANGE mode before
starting to drive up or down steep in-
clines (page 125).
Driving on embankments, slopes and
other steep inclines should only be
done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the
line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climb-
ing ability is a 60% grade.
Do not drive along the side of a slope
(danger of vehicle rollover). If in doing
so, the vehicle begins to show a ten-
dency to roll, immediately steer into a
line of gravity (straight up or downhill).
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over,
never turn it around on steep inclines.
If the vehicle cannot complete the at-
tempted climb, back it down in reverse
gear.
Utilize the engine’s braking power
when descending a slope, observe the
engine speed (do not overview the en-
gine). Apply the service brake as need-
ed.
Check the brakes after a lengthy down-
grade drive.
Traction in steep terrain
Be easy on the accelerator and watch
for continuous wheel traction when
driving in steep terrain.
The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting
out on a steep incline when the front
wheels have then the tendency to slip
due to the weight shifting away the
front axle.
i
Avoid excessive engine speeds – drive
with moderate engine speeds
(max. 3000 RPM).
Select gear range 2 or 1 on the auto-
matic transmission (page 121).
203
Operation
Driving instructions
The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and
limits the torque for the front wheels by
braking them. Simultaneously the
torque for the rear wheels is increased.
Driving across a hilltop
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do
not select gear range N), to prevent the
vehicle from speeding up too much af-
ter climbing a hill.
Use the momentum of the vehicle to
drive across the hilltop.
Driving in this manner prevents the ve-
hicle from jumping across the hilltop
and thus loosing its forward momen-
tum.
Driving downhill
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (page 121).
Drive downhill observing the same
rules as driving uphill (page 202).
The special LOW RANGE – ABS setting
allows for precise and brief (cyclical)
blocking of the front wheels, permitting
them to dig into loose ground.
Remember that the front wheels when
stopped, slide across a surface, thus
loose their ability to steer the vehicle.
Driving through water
120 in (50 cm)
Before driving through water, deter-
mine its depth.
It should not be deeper than approxi-
mately 20 inches (50 cm).
Make sure you check the water bed.
The ground surface may not be firm
which may result in deeper waters than
expected when driving the vehicle
through it.
Switch to LOW RANGE mode before
driving through water (page 125).
204
Operation
Driving instructions
Switch off the exterior lamps as well as
the climate control.
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (page 121).
Enter the water only at a shallow spot,
driving at walking speed.
Do not stop vehicle while immersed in
water, and do not shut off the engine.
There is a very high level of driving re-
sistance in water. The surface is slip-
pery and may not be firm, making
pulling away in water difficult and dan-
gerous.
Clean mud off the tire tread after driv-
ing through water.
To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
brake pedal several times after leaving
the water.
Crossing obstacles
!
Never accelerate before driving into
the water. The bow wave could force
water into the engine and auxiliary
equipment, thus damaging them.
!
Obstacles can damage the vehicle
undercarriage or suspension compo-
nents. If possible use the assistance of
a second person outside the vehicle to
scout the path you intend to take and
check for adequate ground clearance
when you cross obstacles with your ve-
hicle. The person assisting you outside
the vehicle should always be a safe dis-
tance away from the vehicle and posi-
tioned so that he or she cannot get hurt
in case of any unexpected vehicle
movement.
After off-road driving or crossing obsta-
cles, inspect vehicle for any damage,
especially vehicle undercarriage and
suspension components. Failure to do
so can adversely affect the vehicle's fu-
ture performance, including increased
chance of an accident.
205
Operation
Driving instructions
Check the vehicle clearance before
crossing obstacles.
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (page 121).
Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or
big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of
the front wheels at the center of the ob-
stacle, and repeat same with the rear
wheel.
Ruts
A number of off-road tracks or other by-
ways have deep ruts which can cause the
undercarriage to come in contact with the
ground.
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (page 121).
Drive next to the ruts rather than
through them if at all possible.
Returning from off-road driving
!
Special attention is needed when you
cross obstacles on a steep incline.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a
result of its possible slanted position
which in turn may result in the vehicle
tipping or rolling over.
Warning! G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the roadway.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for
possible damage. If the vehicle or tires ap-
pear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
206
Operation
Driving instructions
Off-road driving increases strain on the
vehicle.
We recommend that you inspect the vehi-
cle for possible damage after each off-road
trip. Recognizing any damage and a subse-
quent timely repair reduces the chance of
a possible breakdown or accident later on.
Proceed as follows:
Switch off the LOW RANGE mode
(page 125).
Remove excessive dirt from tires,
wheels, wheel housings, and under-
body.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean
the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes,
and wheels from extreme dirt using a
strong jet of water.
Inspect frame, oil pan, brake hoses,
etc., as well as vehicle underbody for
possible damage.
Check tires for possible damage, clean
all exterior lamps, and conduct a brake
test.
Check for brush or branches caught in
the undercarriage.
They could increase the possibility of a
fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake
lines, puncture rubber bellows of the
axles or drive shafts.
After continued operation in mud,
sand, water or other dirty conditions
clean the brake discs, wheels, brake
pads and check and clean axle joints.
Trailer towing
Warning! G
Failure to use proper equipment and driving
technique can result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol when towing a trailer.
Improper towing or failure to follow the in-
structions contained in this guide can result
in serious injury. Follow the guidelines be-
low carefully to assure safe trailer operation.
Ask your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center should you require an explana-
tion of information contained in this guide.
207
Operation
Driving instructions
Trailer hitches
Only install a trailer hitch receiver ap-
proved for your vehicle.
For information on availability and in-
stallation, see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The bumpers on your vehicle are not
designed for use with clamp-type hitch-
es.
Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them.
To reduce the possibility of damage, re-
move the hitch ball adaptor from the
receiver when not in use.
Electrical connections
The vehicle is prewired to accept the sev-
en-wire harness included in the
Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch re-
ceiver kit.
An additional four-pole conversion plug is
included in the Mercedes-Benz supplied
trailer hitch receiver kit.
For further information, see your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
maximum permissible vehicle weight:
6614 lbs (3000 kg).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW):
Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel,
tools, spare wheel, installed accessories,
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It
must never exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
maximum permissible axle weight:
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the maxi-
mum permissible trailer weight to be
towed:
5000 lbs (2260 kg).
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
maximum permissible weight on the trailer
tongue:
500 lbs (225 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz
approved hitch receiver.
front
rear
2976 lbs
3858 lbs
(1350 kg)
(1750 kg)
208
Operation
Driving instructions
Loading a trailer
When loading a trailer, you should ob-
serve that neither the permissible GTW,
nor the GVWR are exceeded.
Maximum permissible values are listed
on the safety compliance certification
labels for the vehicle and for the trailer
to be towed.
The lowest value listed must be select-
ed when determining how the vehicle
and trailer are loaded.
The tongue weight at the hitch ball
must be added to the GVW to prevent
exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow
vehicle’s rear GAWR.
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer
To assure that the tow vehicle and trail-
er are in compliance with the maximum
permissible weight limits have the load-
ed rig (tow vehicle including driver, pas-
sengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded)
weighed on a commercial scale.
Check the vehicle’s front and rear
Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the GTW and
TW.
The values as measured must not be
exceeded, according to the weight list-
ed under “Vehicle and trailer weight
and ratings”.
Attaching a trailer
Observe maximum permitted trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Most states and all Canadian provinces
require
safety chains between your tow vehicle
and the trailer.
The chains should be crisscrossed un-
der the trailer tongue. They must be at-
tached to the hitch receiver, and not to
the vehicle’s bumper or axle.
Be sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners.
a separate brake system at various
trailer weights.
a break-away switch on trailers with a
separate brake system.
The switch activates the trailer brakes
in the possible event that the trailer
might separate from the tow vehicle.
i
We recommend loading the trailer in
such a manner that it has a tongue
weight (TW) between 10% and 15% of
the GTW.
209
Operation
Driving instructions
Towing a trailer
There are many different laws, including
speed limit restrictions, having to do with
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be le-
gal, not only for where you reside, but also
for where you will be driving. A good
source for this information can be the po-
lice or local authorities.
Note the following points, when driving
with the trailer:
In order to gain skill and an under-
standing of the vehicle’s behavior, you
should practice turning, stopping and
backing up in an area which is free from
traffic.
Before you start driving check the
trailer hitch
break-away switch
safety chains
electrical connections
lighting and tires
Adjust the mirrors to permit unobstructed
view beyond rear of trailer.
If the trailer has electric brakes, start
your vehicle and trailer moving slowly,
and then apply only the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working properly.
Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shifts while driving.
When towing a trailer, check occasion-
ally to be sure that the load is secure,
and that lighting and trailer brakes (if
so equipped) are functioning properly.
Take into consideration that when tow-
ing a trailer, the handling characteris-
tics are different and less stable from
those when operating the vehicle with-
out a trailer.
It is important to avoid sudden maneu-
vers.
!
Do not connect a trailer brake system
(if trailer is so equipped) directly to the
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as
your vehicle is equipped with antilock
brakes. If you do, neither the vehicle’s
brakes nor the trailer’s brakes will func-
tion properly.
i
The provided vehicle electrical wiring
harness for trailer towing has a brake
signal wire (color orange) for hook-up
to a brake controller.
You should consider using a trailer
sway control system. For further infor-
mation see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
210
Operation
Driving instructions
The vehicle and trailer combination is
heavier, and therefore is limited in ac-
celeration and climbing ability, and re-
quires longer stopping distances.
It is more prone to reacti ng to side wind
gusts, and requires more sensitive
steering input.
If possible, do not brake abruptly, but
rather engage the brake slightly at first
to permit the trailer to activate its
brake. Then increase the braking force.
If the transmission hunts between
gears on inclines, manually shift to a
lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1).
A lower gear and reduction of speed re-
duces the chance of engine overload-
ing and/ or overheating.
On very steep inclines, not manageable
with gear selector lever in position 1,
switch transfer case to LOW RANGE
mode (page 125).
When going down a long hill, shift into
a lower gear and use the engine’s brak-
ing effect.
Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheat-
ing the vehicle and trailer brakes.
If the engine coolant rises to an ex-
tremely high temperature (coolant tem-
perature needle approaching the red
zone) when the air conditioning is on,
turn off the air conditioning system.
Engine coolant heat can be additionally
vented by opening the windows,
switching the climate control fan speed
to high and setting the temperature
control to the maximum hot position.
Extreme care must be exercised since
your vehicle with a trailer will require
additional passing distance ahead than
when driving without a trailer.
Because your vehicle and trailer is
longer than your vehicle alone, you will
also need to go much farther ahead of
the passed vehicle before you can re-
turn to your lane.
!
If the trailer should begin to sway, re-
duce the vehicle’s speed and use the
brake controller by hand to straighten
out the vehicle and trailer.
In no case should you attempt to
straighten out the tow vehicle and trail-
er by increasing the speed or overstee-
ring and stepping on the brakes.
211
Operation
Driving instructions
Passenger compartment Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directo-
ry, you should request pertinent informa-
tion from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Control and operation of radio trans-
mitters
MCS, radio and telephone*
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The rear cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. Always use the parti-
tion net when transporting cargo. Partition
net cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Al-
ways fasten items being carried as securely
as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in
the cargo floor area and fastening materials.
Warning! G
Do not forget that your primary responsibili-
ty is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the
MCS, radio or telephone1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every
second.
1Observe all legal requirements.
212
Operation
Driving instructions
Telephones and two-way radios
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
structions regarding use of an external an-
tenna.
Catalytic converter
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our rec-
ommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet. Emission control
Certain engine systems serve to keep the
toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible legal limits.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
justments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center autho-
rized technicians. Engine adjustments
should not be altered in any way. More-
over, the specified service jobs must be
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury. !
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
verters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
Warning! G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
213
Operation
Driving instructions
carried out regularly according to
Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details refer to the Service Booklet.
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise to approx. 248°F
(120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature in the red zone.
Doing so may cause serious engine dam-
age which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open at all times.
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly over-
heated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine com-
partment to catch fire. You could be se-
riously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
214
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling
The fuel filler flap is located on the
left-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking /unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks /unlocks the fuel filler flap.
1Fuel filler flap
2Fuel cap
Remove the key from the steering lock.
Open the fuel filler flap 1 by pulling in
direction of the arrow.
Turn the fuel cap 2 to the left and hold
on to it until possible pressure is re-
leased.
Take off the cap.
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
Warning! G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
!
The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
damage the vehicle paint finish.
!
To prevent damaging the lens of the
plastic tail lamp, make certain that no
gasoline comes into contact with it.
Warning! G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
sure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
zle, which could cause personal injury.
215
Operation
At the gas station
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tight-
ened.
Close the fuel filler flap.
Check regularly and before a long trip
Open the hood (page 217)
1Engine oil level
2Coolant level
For normal replenishing, use water (po-
table water quality). More information
on the coolant level can be found in the
“Operation” section (page 222).
3Brake fluid
4Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
More information on filling the reser-
voir can be found in the “Operation”
section (page 224).
i
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
the ? lamp to illuminate.
See also “Practical hints” section
(page 248).
216
Operation
At the gas station
Engine oil level
More information on engine oil see “Engine
oil” (page 218).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. More in-
formation on replacing light bulbs can be
found in the “Practical hints” section
(page 266).
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflation pressure
can be found in the “Operation” section
(page 227).
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately. Noti-
fy an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center immediately. Do not add
brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see
“Practical Hints” (page 245).
217
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
Opening
1Release lever
Pull release lever 1 downwards.
The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 pro-
trudes slightly from the radiator-grille.
If not, lift the hood slightly.
2Handle for opening the hood
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of the
radiator-grille.
Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning! G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Warning! G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades. 컄컄
218
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing
Let the hood drop from a height of ap-
proximately 1 ft (30 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
the vehicle is new
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning! G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
with the engine running
while starting the engine
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
Warning! G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
!
Do not push the hood closed manually,
as this could damage it.
i
Do not use any special lubricant addi-
tives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz will
restrict your warranty entitlement.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
컄컄
219
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level via display
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
be parked on level ground
be at normal operating temperature
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level via the display
in the speedometer, do the following:
Turn the key in the steering lock to
position 2.
1Button
2Display in speedometer
Wait until the display
------
appears in
the speedometer display 2.
Within one second press button 1
twice.
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the display:
OIL i.O
The oil level is correct. Engine oil
does not to be added.
– 1.0 L
Add 1.0 liter of engine oil.
– 1.5 L
Add 1.5 liters of engine oil.
– 2.0 L
Add 2.0 liters of engine oil.
For adding engine oil see (page 302).
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(page 300) and (page 301).
Other display messages
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear in the
display:
OIL HI
The oil level is too high.
Have excess oil siphoned.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
220
Operation
Engine compartment
The display
------
flashes in the
speedometer display, if a proper oil level
check cannot be performed.
If engine is at normal operating
temperature, wait five minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If engine is not yet at normal operating
temperature, wait 30 minutes before
repeating check procedure.
See the “Practical hints” section
(page 253) if the low engine oil level
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes.
Checking engine oil level with the oil
dipstick
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
be parked on level ground
be at normal operating temperature
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
Open the hood (page 217).
Pull out oil dipstick 1 (page 221).
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
dipstick guide tube.
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately three seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
Oil dipstick
The oil level is correct when it is between
the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of
the oil dipstick.
i
Perform the engine oil level check with
the dipstick if it cannot be completed
via the speedometer display
(page 220).
In this case we recommend that you
have the system checked at a
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
i
The engine oil level can be checked by
either the oil dipstick or via the
speedometer display in the instrument
cluster (page 219). The amount of
engine oil needed is shown more
precisely in the speedometer display.
221
Operation
Engine compartment
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil see (page 221).
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(page 300) and (page 301).
See the “Practical hints” section
(page 253) if the low engine oil level
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes.
Adding engine oil
1Oil dipstick
2Filler cap
Unscrew filler cap 2 from filler neck.
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
i
The filling quantity between the upper
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
!
Only use approved engine oils. For a
listing of approved engine oils, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet in your vehicle literature port-
folio.
In addition, check the oil filler cap for
important information pertaining to the
engine oil needing to meet a specific
Mercedes-Benz specification
(e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is
printed on the oil filler cap, only use an
engine oil from the list of approved en-
gine oils in the Factory Approved Ser-
vice Products pamphlet that meets the
specification indicated on the oil filler
cap. Using engine oils of other specifi-
cation may cause the FSS to incorrect-
ly determine the next service interval
and will result in engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
컄컄
222
Operation
Engine compartment
Screw filler cap 2 back on filler neck.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(page 300) and (page 301).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center check the automatic trans-
mission.
Coolant
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Warning! G
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
imately ½ turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.
컄컄
223
Operation
Engine compartment
1Cap
2COLD LEVEL mark
The coolant level should reach the COLD
LEVEL mark 2 in the reservoir.
Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
imately one half turn to the left to re-
lease any excess pressure.
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
Add coolant as required.
Replace and tighten cap.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(page 304).
Battery
The battery is located in the engine com-
partment.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-
vice life. Refer to Service Booklet for bat-
tery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more frequent-
ly.
When replacing batteries, always use bat-
teries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center about steps you need to observe.
i
If the engine is already at its regular op-
erating temperature, the coolant may
be approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above
the COLD LEVEL mark.
GObserve all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
ARisk of explosion
DKeep flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
BBattery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
224
Operation
Engine compartment
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
1Cap
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of 8.0 US qt (7.6 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards
(arrow).
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or
commercially available premixed wind-
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
pending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could re-
sult in damage to the washer
system/reservoir.
EWear eye protection.
CKeep children away.
FFollow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer
fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
the headlamps.
225
Operation
Engine compartment
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (page 307).
Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
mable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be-
cause it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
226
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and pur-
chase.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
cle when such tires are used.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation.
Important guidelines
Use only sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire pressure loss or damage to
the tire beads.
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first.
Warning! G
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for fur-
ther information. If incorrectly sized rims
and tires are mounted:
The wheel brakes or suspension compo-
nents can be damaged.
The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guar-
anteed.
Warning! G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
227
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advantag-
es, such as better hydroplaning perfor-
mance. To benefit, however, you must
ensure that the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in-
tended direction of rotation of the tire.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at inter-
vals of no more than 14 days.
If the tires are warm, you should only cor-
rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur-
rent operating conditions.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec-
ified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
!
When the wheels are heavily soiled,
e.g. after driving through mud, clean
the inside of the wheels with a jet of
water.
Warning! G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Warning! G
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
Check the tires for punctures from for-
eign objects.
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
228
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
increased while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
Check the spare tire periodically for condi-
tion and inflation. Spare tire will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
Rotating wheels
The wheels can be rotated every 3000 to
6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km) or soon-
er if necessary, according to the degree of
tire wear. The same direction of tire rota-
tion must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and en-
sure proper tire inflation pressure.
i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.
Warning! G
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
cause they are more likely to become punc-
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) as
indicated on the certification label on the
driver’s door pillar. Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Warning! G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size,
229
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
230
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi-
cle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This
service includes:
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
(page 307).
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started even at
low ambient temperatures.
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1/6in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef-
fectiveness of the ABS, ESP, 4-ETS, and
EBP in winter operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all winter
tires mounted are of the same make and
have the same tread design.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
tices are available at your tire dealer or any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Warning! G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
er suitable for winter operation.
Warning! G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
231
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block
heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex-
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Observe the following guidelines when
using snow chains:
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
Snow chains should only be used on all
four wheels. With only two chains avail-
able, they should be mounted on the
rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
Only use snow chains that are ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will be glad to advise you on this
subject.
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(page 81) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the
vehicle’s traction.
232
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
times called for by the FSS (Flexible Ser-
vice System).
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times /mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
1Knob
2Display in the speedometer
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, the type of service is indi-
cated in the speedometer display 2:
9Minor service (A)
½Major service (B)
The following information, depending on
operating conditions throughout the year,
is also shown:
calculated distance remaining
calculated remaining time in days
Clearing the service indicator
The service indicator is automatically
cleared after ten seconds when you switch
on the ignition or when reaching the ser-
vice threshold while driving. You can also
clear it yourself.
Press knob 1.
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
233
Operation
Maintenance
Service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested ser-
vice term:
the 9 or ½symbol appears in
the display 2 for 30 seconds and a
signal sounds after switching on the
ignition.
it is preceded by a “–” (minus symbol).
The Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will
reset the service indicator following a com-
pleted service.
Calling up the service indicator
Within one second press knob 1
twice.
The FSS display will appear for
ten seconds.
Resetting the service indicator
In the event that the service on your vehi-
cle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, you
can reset the service indicator yourself.
Switch ignition on and immediately
press knob 1 twice within
one second.
The present status for days or distance
is displayed.
Within ten seconds turn the key in
steering lock to position 0 (page 33).
Press and hold knob 1 while switch-
ing the ignition on.
The present status for days or distance
is displayed once more.
Continue to hold knob 1.
After approximately ten seconds a sig-
nal sounds, and the display shows
10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km) for
approximately ten seconds.
Release knob 1.
i
If the service indicator was inadvertent-
ly reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing the proper service
as called for by the FSS will cause the
FSS to incorrectly determine the next
service interval which will result in en-
gine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indica-
tor. To arrive at the true service dead-
line, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the ser-
vice indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
234
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external in-
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at-
tack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by ex-
treme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
Air pollution
Road salt
Tar
Gravel and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
diately remove:
Grease and oil
Fuel
Coolant
Brake fluid
Bird droppings
Insects
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi-
nates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
near the ocean
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
during winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
Warning! G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de-
signed for cleaning your vehicle.
235
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet entitled “Vehicle Care Guide”.
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning
the vehicle, always observe manufactur-
er’s operating instructions.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every three to five months, depending on
climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
cle doors, etc.).
!
Never use a round nozzle to
power-wash tires. The intense jet of
water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
tors, seals, or other rubber parts.
236
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment
make sure to protect electrical compo-
nents and connectors from the intrusion of
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
rosion Wax, should be applied to the en-
gine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control link-
age bushings and joints should be lubricat-
ed. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should
be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz
approved Car Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in out-
side mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not for-
get to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
er.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
237
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
1Parktronic system sensors
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
poo, with plenty of water to clean the
sensors 1.
When using a steam cleaner or power
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min-
imum distance of 4 in (10 cm) at
sensors 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not
attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Wiper blades
Fold wiper arm forward.
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
Window cleaning
Fold wiper arms forward.
Use a window cleaning solution on all
glass surfaces. An automotive glass
cleaner is recommended.
An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
mended.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move key from steering lock before cleaning
the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor
might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
key in the steering lock.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move key from steering lock before cleaning
the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor
might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
238
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow instructions on container.
Instrument cluster
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Headliner and rear window shelf
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
key in the steering lock.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
i
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage
the clear coat.
Warning! G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
239
Operation
Vehicle care
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that has the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
colored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Leather upholstery*
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
MB Tex upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
240
241
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
242
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
light up during the bulb self-check when
turning the key in steering lock to
position 2, have it checked and replaced if
necessary.
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
-The yellow ABS warning lamp
comes on while driving.
ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The BAS, ESP, 4-ETS and EBP
are also switched off.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without ABS available.
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking
reducing steering capability.
Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator
(alternator) and the battery checked.
243
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
7The indicator lamp comes on. A BabySmartTM1 child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat. The front passenger
airbag is therefore switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
7The indicator lamp does not light
up with a BabySmartTM child
seat properly installed on the
front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning. Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat and check
installation of the child seat
(page 67).
If the light remains out, have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been
repaired.
1Baby SmartTM is trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
244
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
ÉThe red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-
voir.
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
ÉThe red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking brake set. Release the parking brake
(page 47).
Warning! G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake sys-
tem. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
245
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
É
-The red brake warning lamp
comes on in addition to the yel-
low ABS malfunction lamp and
you hear a warning sound.
There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brake
Proportioning (EBP) system.
The enhanced braking effect is not available.
Have the system checked immediate-
ly at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.
¿The yellow BAS/ESP malfunc-
tion indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
The self-diagnosis has not been completed. The BAS /ESP malfunction indicator lamp
will go out after driving a short distance at
more than approx.12 mph (20 km/h).
246
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
¿The yellow BAS/ESP malfunc-
tion indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
The ESP is no longer synchronized following
a voltage supply interruption (e.g. battery dis-
connected or discharged).
Synchronize the ESP:
With vehicle stationary and the engine
running, turn the steering wheel
completely to the left and then to the
right.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator
lamp does not go out:
Continue driving with added caution.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possi-
ble.
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
!
When synchronizing the ESP, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go with-
out the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
a road curb.
247
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
¿The yellow BAS/ESP malfunc-
tion indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The BAS and the ESP have switched
off.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the BAS and ESP are operational
again.
If necessary, have the generator and
the battery checked.
¿The yellow BAS/ESP malfunc-
tion indicator lamp comes on
while driving.
The BAS or the ESP is malfunctioning. Continue driving with added caution.
Have the BAS /ESP checked at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
248
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
?The yellow “CHECK ENGINE”
malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
There is a malfunction of:
The fuel management system
The ignition system
The emission control system
Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
tion of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the park-
ing brake pedal.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly. Check the fuel cap (page 214).
Your fuel tank is empty. After refuelling start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
249
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
/The yellow coolant warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.
The coolant is to hot.
The coolant level is too low.
Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.
Check the coolant level and add
coolant if necessary (page 222).
If the warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
Have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
The coolant temperature gauge is above
248°F (120 °C).
The coolant level is too low. Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.
Add coolant to prevent engine from
overheating (page 222).
If the coolant level is correct, the electrical
radiator fan may be broken.
If the coolant temperature is below
the red zone, drive on to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
250
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the coolant warning
lamps. Extended driving with the sym-
bol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant. The engine will overheat,
causing major engine damage.
251
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
vThe yellow 4-ETS/ESP warning
lamp comes on steady while
driving.
The ESP is deactivated.
Risk of accident!
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions.
Switch the ESP back on (page 82).
If the ESP cannot be switched back on,
have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
vThe yellow 4-ETS/ESP warning
lamp flashes while driving.
The ESP or 4-ETS has come into operation
because of detected traction loss in at least
one tire.
During take-off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accele-
rator.
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (page 81).
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.
252
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
{The yellow ETS malfunction indi-
cator lamp comes on while driv-
ing.
4-ETS has switched off to prevent overheat-
ing of the brakes. Also see 4-ETS/ESP warn-
ing lamp (page 251).
As soon as the brakes have cooled off,
4-ETS switches on again.
The indicator lamp goes out.
4-ETS is malfunctioning and has switched off. Have the 4-ETS checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
êThe yellow LOW RANGE indicator
lamp flashes after one or more
switching conditions.
The gear selection conditions have not been
adhered to.
Repeat the gear selection process
(page 125).
êThe yellow LOW RANGE indicator
lamp flashes after switching the
ignition on.
LOW RANGE mode is malfunctioning. Have the LOW RANGE mode checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp comes on while
driving.
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
Refuel at the next gas station
(page 214).
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp flashes when leav-
ing the engine running.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly. Check the fuel cap (page 214).
253
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
:The yellow warning lamp flashes
after starting the engine or while
driving.
The engine oil level has sunk to the minimum
level. If the engine oil level continues to sink,
the warning lamp will light up.
Add approved oil at the next gas
station (page 302).
If oil loss is visible on the engine, have
the malfunction corrected as soon as
possible at a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
_The red indicator lamp does not
go out after starting the engine.
The adjustable telescoping steering column
is not properly locked.
Lock the adjustable steering column
(page 39).
The green front fog lamp indica-
tor lamp lights up when ignition
is turned on.
The front fog lamps are switched on. Fog lamps (page 111).
<The red seat belt warning lamp
illuminates for a brief period
after starting the engine.
The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
belts.
Fasten your seat belt (page 64).
WThe yellow low washer system
fluid level lamp comes on after
starting the engine or while driv-
ing.
There is approximately 1.3 US qt. (1.25 l) of
washer fluid remaining in the reservoir.
Add washer fluid (page 224).
The washer fluid may have frozen. Move the vehicle to a warmer environ-
ment so that the washer fluid will
thaw.
Correct the concentration level after
the washer fluid in the reservoir
thaws.
254
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
#The red charge indicator lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
alternator malfunctioning
broken poly-V-belt
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken
Do not continue to drive, before the
poly-V-belt is replaced.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
2The yellow brake indicator lamp
comes on during braking or after
starting the engine.
The brake pads are worn down. Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Service book-
let.
255
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
1The red SRS indicator lamp lights
up while driving.
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys-
tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
Drive with added caution to the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi-
ately to have the system checked, otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpect-
edly and unnecessarily which could result in
an accident/or injury to you or to others.
256
Practical hints
What to do if …
Additional indicators in the speedome-
ter display
Display Possible cause Suggested solution
9Perform minor service (A) (page 232). Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to perform service.
´Perform major service (B) (page 232). Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to perform service.
Á
îThe
StArt
message comes on in
addition to the
Error
message.
The immobilizer is not operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Cana-
da).
257
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is stored in the liftgate.
Open and fold down panel 1.
The first aid kit can be removed.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the cargo
area behind the right trim panel.
1Handles
2Panel
Turn handles 1 90° in direction of
arrows.
Fold down the panel 2.
3Screw
4Vehicle jack with tool kit
Turn screw 3 counterclockwise.
Remove vehicle jack.
Vehicles with CD-changer*
(page 258).
The jack is exclusively designed for lifting
the vehicle during a wheel change. Always
lower the vehicle on sufficient capacity
jackstands before working under the vehi-
cle.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
258
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
1Vehicle jack
2Wheel bolt wrench
3Screwdriver
4Interchangeable slot
Screwdriver 3 is placed inside the wheel-
bolt wrench handle.
Vehicle jack
Please also observe the safety guidelines
in the “Flat tire” section (page 274)
when using the jack.
Vehicle with CD-changer*
To access the vehicle tool kit, swing the
CD-changer out of the panel.
1Screw
2CD-changer
Turn screw 1 counterclockwise.
Swing the CD-changer 2 out of the
panel.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface.
Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated
in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower
the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jack-
stands before working under the vehicle.
259
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Spare wheel (space-saver tire)
Use the spare wheel only temporarily,
while observing the following restrictions:
Do not exceed vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest repair facility to
have the flat tire repaired or replaced
as appropriate.
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Removing spare wheel
The spare wheel is located behind the rear
bumper.
1Cover
Hold left and right side of cover 1 and
pull away from bumper.
2Screw
3Spare wheel carrier
4Lever
Turn screw 2 counterclockwise using
the wrench (page 258).
Screw 2 remains in spare wheel
carrier 3.
Lift spare wheel carrier slightly and
push lever 4 to the right using screw-
driver (page 257).
Swing spare wheel carrier 3 down and
pull it out from under the bumper.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel.
i
Please comply with the instructions for
“Mounting the spare wheel”
(page 274).
Warning! G
Exercise care when removing or installing
spare wheel to prevent personal injury.
컄컄
260
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
5Bayonet lock
Turn the bayonet lock 5 90° to the
left.
Pull off bayonet lock 5.
Remove the spare wheel cover and the
spare wheel.
Store bayonet lock 5 and spare wheel
cover in cargo area.
Replace the spare wheel carrier and se-
cure it in place.
Install cover 1 to the bumper.
!
When storing the space-saver spare
wheel in its holder, secure it using the
bayonet lock.
컄컄
261
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the driver’s door
If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
door using the remote control, open the
door using the key.
1Release button
Press release button 1 on the remote
control.
The key folds out.
2Unlocking
3Locking
Remove the protective cap from the
door lock.
Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left.
i
Unlocking and opening the driver’s
door with the mechanical key will trig-
ger the anti-theft alarm system. To can-
cel the alarm, do one of the following:
Press button Πor on the
remote control.
Insert the key in the steering lock.
262
Practical hints
Unlocking/ locking in an emergency
Locking the vehicle
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the remote control, lock it with the me-
chanical key as follows:
Close the passenger doors and the lift-
gate.
Press the upper part of the central
locking button in the cockpit
(page 93).
Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the passenger doors are still
visible. If necessary push them down
manually.
Lock the liftgate if necessary from in-
side (page 91).
Lock the driver’s door with the me-
chanical key.
Changing batteries in the remote
control
If the batteries in the remote control are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
1Release button
2Battery cover
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
Unfold the key by pressing release
button 1.
Warning! G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
i
When changing batteries, always re-
place both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
263
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Pull off battery cover 2 in direction of
arrow.
Remove the batteries.
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-
teries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
Press battery cover 2 onto housing
until locked in place.
Push each button to assure proper op-
eration of the remote control.
If remote control does not function cor-
rectly after replacing the batteries, the
system may have to be resynchronized.
Synchronizing remote control
Turn key in steering lock to position 2
(page 33), then to position 0 and re-
move.
Within ten seconds, push and hold
button while pushing
button Πfive times.
Release the button, and press ,
Œ or Š once.
The remote control is resynchronized.
Recheck all of the remote control func-
tions.
Fuel filler flap
1Cover
2Lock rod
Open the tailgate.
Open cover 1 in cargo area behind
the left trim panel.
Turn lock rod 2 clockwise (arrow) to
the end stop.
The fuel filler flap can now be opened.
i
If it is not possible to resynchronize the
remote control, have the system
checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
264
Practical hints
Unlocking/ locking in an emergency
Manually unlocking the transmission
gear selector lever
In the case of power failure the transmis-
sion gear selector lever can be manually
unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
1Pin
Insert a pin 1, e.g. ball point pen, into
the covered opening below the
position D of the shift pattern.
Perform the following two steps simul-
taneously:
Push the pin down.
Move gear selector lever from
position P.
Remove pin 1.
The cover returns to its closed position
after moving the gear selector lever to
position D.
i
The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.
265
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Sliding/pop-up roof*
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof manually should an electrical malfunc-
tion occur.
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located
behind the cover between the front interior
lamps.
1Hexagon drive hole
2Crank
3Cover
Pry off cover 3 using a flat blade
srewdriver.
Obtain crank 2.
Insert crank 2 through hole.
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
slide roof closed
raise roof at the rear
Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
slide roof open
lower roof at the rear
The sliding/pop-up roof must be synchro-
nized if it has been operated manually
(page 149).
i
Push crank 2 upward while turning it,
to disengage the electric motor.
266
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for headlamp adjustment.
Bulbs Front lamps
i
If the headlamps are fogged up on the
inside as a result of high humidity, driv-
ing the vehicle a distance should clear
out the fogging.
Lamp Type
1Fog lamp H8 (35 W)
2High beam H7 (55 W)
3Low beam H7 (55 W)
Xenon* D2S-35 W
4Turn signal,
parking, stand-
ing and side
marker lamp
1157 NA
(32/3 cp bulb)
5Additional turn
signal
LED
267
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow-
ing lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:
Additional turn signals in the exteri-
or rear view mirrors
Bi-Xenon lamps*
Front fog lamps (vehicles with sport
package)*
Lamp Type
6Brake lamp 1073
(32 cp bulb)
7Backup lamp 1073
(32 cp bulb)
8Turn signal lamp PY 21 W
9Tail, parking and
standing lamp
Rear fog lamp, driv-
er’s side
P 21/4 W
aSide marker lamp W5W
bHigh mounted brake
lamp
1073
(32 cp bulb)
cLicense plate lamps C 5 W
Warning! G
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al-
low the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
touch or move it when hot
drop the bulb
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
268
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Replacing low beam bulbs
1Low beam halogen or Bi-Xenon* head-
lamp cover with locking tab
2Electrical connector
Bi-Xenon* headlamp
Halogen headlamp
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood (page 217).
Push down tab at top end of cover 1
and remove.
Pull electrical connector 2 off.
Unclip the retainer springs and take out
the bulb.
Insert the new bulb so that the base lo-
cates in the recess on the holder.
Clip the retainer springs.
Plug the connector 2 onto the bulb.
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
Warning! G
Do not remove the cover 1 for the
Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage
in xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace
the bulb or repair the lamp and its compo-
nents. We recommend that you have such
work done by a qualified technician.
269
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam bulbs
1High beam headlamp cover with lock-
ing tab
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood (page 217).
Twist cover 1 counterclockwise and
remove.
2Electrical connector
Pull electrical connector 2 off.
Unclip the retainer springs and take out
the bulb.
Insert the new bulb so that the base lo-
cates in the recess on the holder.
Clip the retainer springs.
Plug the connector 2 onto the bulb.
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
Turn signal, parking, standing and side
marker lamp bulbs
1Bulb socket
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood (page 217).
Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise
and pull out.
Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
Reinstall the bulb socket. 컄컄
270
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
Fog lamp bulbs
1Fog lamp
Switch off the lights.
Use a suitable object (e.g. screwdriver)
to press on the release lever behind the
front panel.
Front fog lamp 1 releases.
Remove fog lamp out of bumper.
2Bulb socket
3Tabs
Twist bulb socket 2 counterclockwise
to its end stop and pull out.
Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
Insert new bulb in socket.
Reinstall bulb socket 2.
Twist bulb socket 2 clockwise to its
end stop.
Reinstall fog lamp into the bumper.
Make sure tabs 3 firmly seat into the
slots of holder.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
Switch off the lights.
Open liftgate.
1Screws
2Tail, parking and standing lamp
Fog lamp, driver’s side
3Side marker lamp
4Turn signal lamp
5Backup lamp
6Brake lamp
Remove screws 1.
Remove tail lamp.
컄컄
271
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
7Tabs
Squeeze tabs 7 together and remove
bulb holder.
Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise.
Reinstall bulb holder. You should hear
it engage.
Insert the tail lamp in the body, lower
edge first. Make sure it engages.
Retighten screws with washers on
them.
License plate lamp
1License plate lamp
2Screws
Switch off the lights.
Loosen both screws 2 and remove
lamp.
Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
lamp.
Retighten the screws.
High mounted brake lamp
1Cover
2Tab
Switch off the lights.
Squeeze both sides of cover 1, fold it
forward and remove.
Press tab 2 on reflector and remove
reflector.
Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise. 컄컄
272
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Insert reflector from the left so that it
engages on the right.
Position tabs of cover in slots and rein-
stall cover until properly seated.
Adjusting headlamp aim
VVertical centerline
HHeadlamp mounting high, measured
from the center
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. To check and readjust a head-
lamp, follow the steps described:
Park the vehicle on a level surface
25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test
screen or wall.
Switch the headlamps on
(page 110).
If the beam does not show a beam pattern
as indicated in the figure left, then follow
the steps below:
Open hood (page 217).
2Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
3Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
Always turn adjustment screws 2
and 3 simultaneously for vertical ad-
justment until the headlamp is adjust-
ed as shown 1. Turn clockwise for
upward movement and counterclock-
wise for downward movement.
Graduations:
screw 2: 0.50° pitch
screw 3: 0.67° pitch
The left and right headlamps must be ad-
justed individually.
i
High beam adjustments simultaneous-
ly aim the low beam.
Vehicle should have a normal trunk
load.
i
If it is not possible to obtain a proper
headlamp adjustment, have the system
checked at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
컄컄
273
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
Removing
Fold the wiper arm forward.
Turn wiper blade at a right angle to wip-
er arm.
1Wiper blade
2Safety tab
Press safety tab down 2.
Push wiper blade downward 1 and re-
move.
Installing
Slide the wiper blade into end of wiper
arm until it locks in place.
Fold the wiper arm back to rest on the
windshield. Make sure you hold onto
the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, remove key from steer-
ing lock before replacing a wiper blade. Oth-
erwise the motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
!
Never open the hood when the wiper
arms are folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
274
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
Move the gear selector lever to P.
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Take the spare wheel out of its carrier
(page 259).
Lifting the vehicle
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
Place one chock in front of and one be-
hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
site to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
Place chocks on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
Take the two-piece wheel wrench and
the jack out of the rear compartment
area (page 257). Assemble wheel
wrench.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, en-
sure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
275
Practical hints
Flat tire
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
proximately one full turn with wrench).
The jack take-up brackets are located di-
rectly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.
1Take-up bracket
2Jack
Place jack on firm ground.
Position jack 2 under the take-up
bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an in-
cline.
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while vehi-
cle is raised.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up brack-
et. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
!
Do not position the jack on the body of
the vehicle, as this may cause damage
to the vehicle.
276
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
Unscrew and remove all wheel bolts.
Remove the remaining bolts.
Grip the wheel from the sides and re-
move it.
Mounting the new wheel
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
Install spare wheel on wheel hub.
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
Lowering the vehicle
Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
ly on its own weight.
Remove the jack.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while in-
stalling first wheel bolt.
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
Warning! G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
277
Practical hints
Flat tire
1-5Wheel bolts
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Store jack and tool kit.
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
i
The removed road wheel cannot be
stored in the spare wheel carrier, but
should be transported in the rear cargo
compartment wrapped in a protective
cover supplied with the vehicle.
The protective cover is located in the
rear cargo compartment behind the
cover in the right side trim panel.
278
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
The battery is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment.
1Negative terminal
2Positive terminal
Warning! G
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
sult in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries
(page 223).
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery termi-
nal clamps while the engine is running
or the key is in the steering lock. Other-
wise the alternator and other electronic
components could be severely dam-
aged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Refer to Service Booklet for mainte-
nance intervals or contact your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for further information.
Warning! G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
279
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery
Depress parking brake firmly or move
gear selector lever to position P.
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Remove key from the steering lock.
Open the hood (page 217).
Disconnect the battery negative lead.
Remove the cover from the positive ter-
minal.
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Removing the batteries
Remove the screw securing the bat-
tery.
Remove the battery support and brack-
et. Take out the battery.
Charging and reinstalling batteries
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in re-
verse order.
Reconnecting the batteries
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.
Connect the negative lead.
Warning! G
With a disconnected battery
you will no longer be able to turn the key
in the steering lock
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
Warning! G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-
ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
280
Practical hints
Battery
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
i
The following procedures must be car-
ried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-
tion):
Set the clock (page 118).
Set the date in trip computer
(page 186).
Calibrate the compass
(page 188).
Resynchronize the ESP
(page 246).
Resynchronize side power windows
(page 146).
Resynchronize sliding/pop-up
roof*(page 149).
281
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the bat-
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow-
ing:
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic convert-
er are cold.
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start-
ing with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle's electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Use only jumper cables with sufficient-
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when the engine is
started or running.
Warning! G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
tempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine us-
ing a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several un-
successful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
282
Practical hints
Jump starting
The battery is located on the right side of
the engine compartment.
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
Turn off all electrical consumers.
Apply parking brake.
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
Open the hood.
Connect positive terminals 1 and 4
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to positive terminal 4 of
charged battery first.
1Positive terminal of discharged battery
2Negative terminal of discharged
battery
3Negative terminal of charged battery
4Positive terminal of charged battery
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
Connect negative terminals 2 and 3
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to negative terminal 3 of
charged battery first.
Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
Now you can turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
Remove the jumper cables first from
the negative terminals 2 and 3 and
then from positive terminals 1
and 4.
You can now turn on the lights.
Have the battery checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Warning! G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries
(page 223).
!
Never invert the terminal connections.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
283
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi-
cle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is pref-
erable to other types of towing.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehi-
cle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground only so far as necessary to have the
vehicle moved to a safe location where the
recommended towing methods can be em-
ployed.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip-
ment, with key in steering lock turned
to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts. Use the towing eyes.
Switch off the ESP (page 81),
tow-away alarm (page 85) and the
automatic central locking (page 93).
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the gear selector lever
must be in position N and the key must
be in steering lock position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the vehicle may be
towed only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h).
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised (observe instructions re-
garding flexible drive shaft), the engine
must be shut off (key in steering lock
position 1). Otherwise, the 4-ETS may
become engaged which may cause loss
of towing control.
!
To be certain to avoid additional dam-
age to the vehicle powertrain, however
you should observe the following:
With damage to the front axle
raise front axle
remove flexible drive shaft be-
tween rear axle and transfer
case
With damage to the rear axle
raise rear axle
tow vehicle with wheel lift or
dolly placed under front wheels
With damage to the transfer case
remove flexible drive shaft to
the drive axles
Always install new self-locking nuts
when reinstalling flexible drive shaft.
284
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning! G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
the engine will not run
there is a malfunction in the power sup-
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the key is in
steering lock position 2.
If the key is left in steering lock position 0
for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
key from steering lock and reinsert.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
hicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
i
To signal turns while being towed with
hazard warning flasher in use, turn key
in steering lock to position 2 and acti-
vate combination switch for left or right
turn signal in usual manner – only the
selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz-
ard warning flasher will operate again.
i
The vehicle cannot be started via
tow-start.
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, note the following:
With the automatic central locking acti-
vated and the key in steering lock
position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the
left front wheel is turning at vehicle
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
To prevent the vehicle doors from lock-
ing, deactivate the automatic central
locking (page 93).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the towing eye. Never at-
tach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to
vehicle chassis, frame or suspension
parts.
285
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Front towing eye
The front towing eye is located on the pas-
senger side below the bumper.
1Towing eye
Rear towing eye
The rear towing eye is located behind the
right side cover in the bumper panel.
ML 350, ML 500
1Cover
2Towing eye
To remove cover:
Pry out the cover 1 using a flat blade
screwdriver (page 257).
To reinstall cover:
Engage cover at bottom and press in
top securely.
i
The gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P and the key will not
turn in the steering lock if the battery is
disconnected or discharged. See notes
on the battery (page 278) or on jump
starting (page 281).
Manual unlocking transmission gear
selector lever (page 264).
Warning! G
In order to avoid possible serious burns or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the cover, because the rear exhaust pipe is
extremely hot.
286
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Vehicles with sport package*
1Cover
2Towing eye
To remove cover:
Grip cover 1 at bottom and securely
pull out.
To reinstall cover:
Engage cover and press in securely.
Stranded vehicle
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should
be done with the greatest of care, especial-
ly if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Avoid pulling the vehicle jerkily or diago-
nally, since it could result in damage to the
chassis alignment.
Never try to free a vehicle that is still cou-
pled to a trailer.
If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward
in its own previously made tracks.
287
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
The fuse chart is printed on the corre-
sponding fuse box cover. The amperages
of the fuses are also indicated there.
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is located in the engine com-
partment on the left-hand side.
1Clamps
2Fuse box cover
Removing /installing cover
Release clamps 1.
Lift fuse box cover 2 up.
Install cover 1 in reverse order.
3Fuse chart
4Fuse extractor
5Spare fuses
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rat-
ing.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
288
Practical hints
Fuses
Auxiliary fuse box in front passenger
footwell
The auxiliary fuse box is located in the
front passenger compartment.
1Lock
2Cover
Removing/installing cover
Turn both locks 1 90° counterclock-
wise.
Remove cover 2 in direction of arrow.
Install cover 2 in reverse order.
289
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
290
Technical data
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
Spare parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts parts required for
maintenance and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts distribution cen-
ters provide quick and reliable parts ser-
vice.
More than 300 000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz spare
parts should be installed.
!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s dura-
bility or safety.
291
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the “warranties” printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will exchange or repair any defec-
tive parts originally installed on the vehicle
in accordance with the terms of the follow-
ing warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
292
Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels
1Certification label and Paintwork num-
ber
2Engine number (engraved on engine)
3VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
4Emission control label
Vacuum line routing for emission con-
trol system
5Information label, California version
i
When ordering spare parts, please
specify vehicle identification and en-
gine numbers.
293
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
1Automatic belt tensioner
2Power steering pump
3Air conditioning compressor
4Crankshaft
5Coolant pump
6Generator (alternator)
7Idler pulley
294
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model ML 350 (163.1571)
1The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
ML 500 (163.175)1
Engine 112 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.81 in (97.00 mm) 3.81 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 227 cu in (3724 cm3)303 cu in (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 232 hp/5750 rpm
(173 kW/5750 rpm)
288 hp/5600 rpm
(215 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 254 lb-ft/3000-4500 rpm
(345 Nm /3000-4500 rpm)
325lb-ft/2700rpm
(440 Nm/2700 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2370 mm 2370 mm
295
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
poor handling characteristics
increased noise
increased fuel consumption
Rims and tires
!
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, ex-
hibit dimensional variations and differ-
ent tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. This may result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
i
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. A
tire inflation pressure table is located
on the fuel filler cap of the vehicle. The
tire pressure should be checked regu-
larly and should only be adjusted on
cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s
maintenance recommendation includ-
ed with vehicle.
Model ML 350 ML 500
Rims (light alloy) 8J x 17 H2 81/2J x 17 H2
Wheel offset 2.0in (52mm) 2.0 in (52 mm)
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 255/60 R17 106 H 275/55 R17 109 V
Rims* (light alloy) 8 1/2 J x 17 H2 81/2 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset* 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.85 in (47 mm)
All-season tires (radial-ply tires)* 275/55 R17 109 V 275/55 R17 109 V
296
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
Model ML 350, ML 500
Rim 4Jx18 H2 ET0
Wheel offset 0 in (0 mm)
Space-saver tire T155/90 D18 113M1
1Must not be used with snow chains.
297
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model ML 350 ML 500
Generator (alternator) 14 V/120 A 14 V/150 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/100 Ah 12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F 8 DPP332
Bosch F 8 DPER
Bosch F 8 DPP332
Bosch F 8 DPER
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
298
Technical data
Main Dimensions
Main Dimensions
Model ML 350, ML 500
Overall vehicle length 182.6 in (4638 mm)
Overall vehicle width 83.7 in (2126 mm)
Overall vehicle height 71.7 in (1820 mm)
Wheelbase 111.0 in (2820 mm)
Track, front 61.2 in (1555 mm)
Track, rear 61.2 in (1555 mm)
Ground clearance 8.03 in (204 mm)
Turning radius 468.5 in (11.9 m)
299
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Roof load max. 220 lbs (100 kg)
300
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match.
Therefore use only brands tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine with oil filter ML 350, ML 500 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
Automatic transmis-
sion
9.0 US qt (8.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil
Transfer case 1.6 US qt (1.5 l) (Dexron 3 or Dexron 2E)
Rear axle 1.3 US qt (1.25 l) (Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90)
Front axle 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) (Hypoid gear oil SAE 90)
Power steering approx. 0.65 US qt (0.6 l) MB Power Steering Fluid
Front wheel hubs approx. 1.5oz (43g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
301
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Cooling system approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Fuel tank ML 350, ML 500 22.0 US gal (83.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON
including a reserve of approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l)
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning
system*
8.0 US qt (7.6 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available pre-
mixed windshield washer solvent/ antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (page 307).
302
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
only engine oils approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved
engine oils is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air condition-
ing system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu-
bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
ous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bub-
bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
tem’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be re-
placed every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will provide you with additional in-
formation.
!
Always check the oil filler cap
(page 221) for important information
pertaining to the engine oil needing to
meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specifi-
cation (e.g. MB 229.5). If such informa-
tion is printed on the oil filler cap, only
use an engine oil from the list of ap-
proved engine oils in the Factory Ap-
proved Service Products pamphlet that
meets the specification indicated on
the oil filler cap.
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter-
mine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
303
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements
Use only premium unleaded meeting
ASTM standard D 439:
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane num-
ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufac-
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos-
its.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to en-
gine performance problems such as:
Warm-up hesitation
Unstable idle
Knocking/pinging
Misfire
Power loss
Do not blend other specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
costs and may be harmful to the engine
operation.
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gaso-
line must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two per-
sons and no luggage.
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum ac-
celerator pedal position if the vehi-
cle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
304
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion / antifreeze, which pro-
vides:
Corrosion protection
Freeze protection
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corro-
sion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool-
ant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in boil-over pro-
tection. Refer to Service Booklet for
replacement interval.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approx. - 22°F
[-30°C]). If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze
protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the
engine temperature will increase due to
the lower heat transfer capability of the so-
lution. Therefore, do not use more than
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB
anticorrosion/antifreeze should be used
to bring it up to the proper level (have cool-
ing system checked for signs of leakage).
Please make sure the mixture is in accor-
dance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, con-
sult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
305
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
nents in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that
anticorrosion/ antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
result in a significantly shortened service
life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for service.
306
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
ML 350, ML 500, 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
307
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Both the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system* are supplied from the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid
reservoir has a capacity of approx.
8.0 US qt (7.6 l).
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or
concentrate and commercially avail-
able premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on am-
bient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].
For temperatures below freezing, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
1partS to 100parts solvent
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
mable. Do not spill washer
solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, be-
cause it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
308
Technical data
Consumer information
Consumer information
This has been prepared as required of all
manufacturers of passenger cars under
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1½) times as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Tread wear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
Warning! G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straightahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
309
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning! G
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
310
311
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is in-
stalled on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (indicator
lamp 7 in the instrument cluster
lights up). See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the pas-
senger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situa-
tions. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more in-
tense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service cen-
ter, which can help you with any ques-
tions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a break-
down.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control ve-
hicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the pas-
senger compartment needed for vehi-
cle operation and monitoring.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for auto-
matically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine pro-
duced.
312
Technical terms
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (vis-
cosity) of the oil at different tempera-
tures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tol-
erate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and direc-
tional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the sys-
tem's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the speedometer
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector
lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special re-
ceivers. Employs CD or DVD digital
maps for navigation.
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight
on each axle must never exceed the
GAWR for the front and rear axle indi-
cated on the certification label located
on the driver’s door pillar.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare
wheel, installed accessories, passen-
gers and cargo. The GVW must never
exceed the GVWR, indicated on the
certification label located on the driv-
er’s door pillar.
313
Technical terms
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehi-
cle weight. It is indicated on certifica-
tion label located on the driver’s door
pillar.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, in-
cluding the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmis-
sion down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehi-
cle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Line of fall
The direct line that an object moves
downhill when influenced by the force
of gravity alone.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or un-
locked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
MCS
(Modular Control System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and the ra-
dio and navigation system, as well as
for other optional equipment (CD
changer, telephone, etc.).
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized meth-
od. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
A display field in the instrument cluster
used to present information provided
by the control system.
Parktronic system* (Parking assist)
System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during park-
ing maneuvers.
314
Technical terms
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all compo-
nents used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, includ-
ing
engine
clutch/torque converter
transmission
transfer case
drive shaft
differential
axle shafts/axles
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and cur-
rent location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for sub-
scribers to Tele Aid service.
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehi-
cle interior for a short time after the en-
gine has been turned off.
Restraint system
Seat belts, belt tensioner, airbags and
child seat restraint systems. As inde-
pendent systems, their protective func-
tions complement one another.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gaso-
line as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gaso-
line's ability to resist undesired detona-
tion (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector le-
ver from being moved out of position P
without key turned and brake pedal de-
pressed.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de-
vice and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
315
Technical terms
Tele Aid System*
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and man-
ual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
tivated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquain-
tance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
vided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not dam-
aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms “telecom-
munications” and “informatics”.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is ap-
proved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
Transfer case
Speed of rotation/torque converter
that works together with the ->auto-
matic transmission. In the LOW mode
off-road position, the transfer case de-
creases the output rotational speed of
the ->automatic transmission by ap-
proximately half. This results in a corre-
sponding increase of torque on the
drive axles.
The vehicle then has nearly double the
driving force but drives only approxi-
mately half as fast.
TWR
(Tongue Weight Rating)
The TWR is the maximum permissible
weight on the trailer tongue.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio sys-
tems (radio, CD, etc.).
316
317
Index
A
ABS 25, 76, 311
ABS control 76
LOW RANGE mode 77
Malfunction indicator lamp 242
Warning lamp 242
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 123
Accident
In case of 52
Activating
Air circulation mode 139
Air recirculation mode 139
Anti-theft alarm system 83
Automatic climate control 135
ESP 82
Exterior headlamps 48
Hazard warning flasher 112
Headlamps 48
High beams 110
Ignition 33
Immobilizer 54, 83
Rear passenger compartment ventila-
tion and climate control 141
Rear window defroster 133
Rear window wiper 51
Residual heat 140
Seat heater* 98
Tow-away alarm 85
Warning indicators (Parktronic*) 155
Windshield wipers 50
Activating automatic central locking 93
Adding
Coolant 223
Engine oil 221
Additional turn signals 266
Adjustable steering column
Indicator lamp 253
Adjusting 34
Backrest tilt 36, 38
Exterior rear view mirror 40
Head restraint height 36, 38
Head restraint tilt 37, 39
Headlamp aim 272
Instrument cluster illumination 116
Manual seat 35
Mirrors 40
Power seats* 37
Seat cushion tilt 38
Seat fore and aft 35
Seat fore and aft adjustment 37
Seat height 36, 38
Seats 34
Steering wheel 39
Adjusting air distribution
Automatic climate control 137
Adjusting air volume
Automatic climate control 137
Air conditioner (cooling)
Turning on 139
Air conditioning
Cooling 139
318
Index
Air conditioning refrigerant 302
Air outlets
Automatic climate control 142
Air pressure see Tire inflation
pressure 227
Air recirculation mode 138
Activating 139
Deactivating 139
AIRBAG OFF
Warning lamp 243
Airbags 59
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 311
BabySmartTM deactivation
system 70
Children 60
Front 63
Passenger 63
Safety guidelines 62
Side impact 64
Window curtain 64
Alarm
Audible 75, 84, 86
Canceling 84, 86
Visual 83
Alarm system
Anti-theft 83
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 305
Antiglare
Automatic 126
Antilock brake system (ABS) 311
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 83
Canceling alarm 84, 86
Disarming 84
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system 83
Immobilizer 83
Tow-away alarm, glass breakage
sensor 84
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 197
Armrest
Storage compartment in front of 165
Storage spaces 165
Armrest in rear seat bench 167
Ashtray
Front center console 168
Rear center console 169
ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 222
Attaching a trailer 208
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 126
Automatic central locking
Activating 93
Deactivating 93
Automatic climate control 134
Adjusting air distribution 137
Adjusting air volume 137
Air conditioning 139
Air outlets 142
Air recirculation mode 138
Basic setting 137
Changing basic setting 137
Defrosting 138
Economy mode 135
319
Index
Rear passenger compartment 141
Rear window defroster 133
Residual heat utilization 140
Residual ventilation 140
Switching off 137
Switching on 137
Automatic headlamp mode 108
Automatic interior lighting control
Activating 113
Deactivating 113
Automatic locking when driving 93
Automatic transmission 119
Accelerator position 123
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 124
Gear ranges 121
Gear selector lever position 122
Gear shifting malfunctions 124
Kickdown 123
Manual shifting 120
One-touch gearshifting 120
Selector lever position 119
Towing a trailer 124
Transmission fluid 222
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 70
Compatible child seats 70, 311
Self-test 70
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 311
Backrest tilt 35
Backup lamps 267, 270
Bulbs 267
BAS 78, 311
Malfunction indicator lamp 245, 246,
247
Warning lamp 245, 246, 247
Batteries, remote control
Changing 262
Batteries, vehicle 223
Battery discharged
Jump starting 281
Battery indicator lamp
Indicator lamp 254
Battery, vehicle 223, 278
Charging 279
Disconnecting 279
Reconnecting 279
Reinstalling 279
Removing 279
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 311
Blocking
Rear door window operation 73
Brake assist system (BAS) 311
Brake fluid 302
Brake lamp bulbs 267
Brake lamp, high mounted 267
Brake pad wear
Indicator lamp 254
Brakes 194
Warning lamp 244
Break-in period 192
320
Index
Bulbs, replacing 266
Additional turn signals 266
Backup lamps 267
Brake lamps 267
Fog lamps 266
Front fog lamp 270
Front lamps 266
High beam 266
High mounted brake lamp 267, 271
License plate lamps 267, 271
Low beam 266
Parking lamps 266, 267, 269
Rear fog lamp 267
Rear fog lamps 270
Rear side marker lamp bulbs 270
Side marker lamps 266, 267, 269
Standing lamps 266, 267
Tail lamp assemblies 267, 270
Turn signal lamps 266, 267, 269
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 311
Calibrating compass 188
California
Important notice 11
Calling up
Service indicator 233
CAN system 311
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 300
Cargo area cover blind* 161
Closing 161
Installing 162
Opening 161
Removing 161
Cargo area see Cargo compartment 89
Cargo compartment
Liftgate 89
Lighting 114
Tie-down rings 158
Cargo floor plates 162
Installing 163
Removing 162
Storing 162
Cargo tie-down rings 158
Catalytic converter 212
CD-changer* 258
Center console 27
Lower part 28
Upper part 27
Central locking
Automatic 93
From inside 93
Switch 94
Unlocking from inside 93, 94
Central locking switch 94
Certification label 292
Charge indicator lamp 254
Charging
Vehicle battery 279
321
Index
Chart
Fuses 287
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 248
Checking
Coolant level 215, 222
Oil level 218
Tire inflate pressure 216
Vehicle lighting 216
Checking weights
Trailer and vehicle 208
Checklist
Off-road driving 201
Returning from off-road driving 206
Child safety 67
Airbags 60
Infant and child restraint systems 64,
68
LATCH child seat mounts 72
Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
door window operation 73
Cigarette lighter
Front center console 168
Cleaning
Cup holder 238
Gear selector lever 238
Hard plastic trim items 238
Headlamps 131
Headliner 238
Instrument cluster 238
Leather upholstery 239
Light alloy wheels 238
MB Tex upholstery 239
Plastic and rubber parts 239
Seat belts 238
Steering wheel 238
Windows 237
Windshield 50
Wiper blades 237
Clock 26, 118
Closing
Glove box 164
Hood 218
Liftgate 92
Rear quarter windows* 147
Side windows 145
Sliding/pop-up roof* 148, 265
Closing sliding/pop-up roof*
In an emergency 265
Cockpit 22, 311
Combination switch
High beam flasher 49, 110
Turn signals 49
Windshield wipers 49
Compass 187
Calibrating 188
Setting compass zone 188
Compass zone 188
Consumer information 308
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 211
322
Index
Coolant 222, 304
Adding 223
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
quantity 304
Checking level 222
Indicator lamp 249
Temperature 213
Temperature gauge 117
Coolant level
Checking 215, 222
Crossing obstacles 204
Cruise control 150, 311
Canceling 151
Driving downhill 151
Driving uphill 151
Fine adjustment 152
LOW RANGE mode 152
Saving current speed 151
Setting speeds 152
Cruise control lever 150
Cup holder 166
Cleaning 238
In front seat armrest 167
In instrument panel 166
In rear centerconsole 167
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 311
D
Daytime running lamp mode 109
Deactivating
Air conditioning (cooling) 139
Air recirculation mode 139
Alarm 84
Anti-theft alarm system 84
Automatic climate control 135, 137
Cruise control 151
Defrost 138
Engine 54
ESP 81
Front fog lamps, rear fog lamp 111
Hazard warning flasher 112
Headlamps 54
Immobilizer 83
Rear passenger compartment ventila-
tion and climate control 141
Rear window defroster 133
Residual heat 140
Seat heater* 98
Tow-away alarm 85
Tow-away alarm (vehicles with trip
computer*) 85
Tow-away alarm (vehicles without trip
computer*) 86
Deactivating automatic central
locking 93
Deep water see Standing water 200
Defogging
Windshield 138
Defrosting 138
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while
driving 51
With starting 47
Direction of rotation (tires) 227
Discharged battery
Jump starting 281
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 279
Display in the speedometer 117
323
Index
Display messages
Error 256
Service indicator (FSS) 256
StArt 256
Displays
Messages 219
Service indicator 232
Distance remaining 189
Door entry lamps 113
Door unlock
With Tele Aid* 179
Doors
Opening from inside vehicle 90
Opening from outside 89
Downhill driving
Cruise control 151
Downshifting 120
Drink holder see Cup holder 167
Drinking and driving 193
Driving 42, 47
Abroad 211
In winter 198
Problems 51
Safety systems 76
Through standing water 200
Driving abroad 211
Driving instructions
Towing a trailer 209
Driving off 195
Driving safety systems
4-ETS 79
ABS 76
BAS 78
ESP 80
Driving systems 150
Cruise control 150
Driving safety systems 76
EBP 80
Parktronic* 153
Driving through water 203
E
Easy entry/exit feature* 101
EBP 80
Indicator lamp 245
Economy mode
Automatic climate control 135
Electrical connections
Trailer 207
Electrical fuses 287
Electrical outlet 170
Electrical system
Technical data 297
Electrically folding exterior rear view
mirrors 128
Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP
Electronic Stability Program see ESP 25,
80
Electronic stability program see ESP 312
Electronic Traction System see 4-ETS 25
Emergency call system
Requirements 172
Emergency call system* 172
324
Index
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 175
With Tele Aid* 173
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 124
Emergency operations
Closing sliding/pop-up roof* 265
Locking the vehicle 262
Opening sliding/pop-up roof* 265
Remote door unlock 179
Unlocking the vehicle 261
Emergency tensioning device see
ETD 67, 312
Emission control 212
Emission control label 292
Engine
Starting 46
Technical data 294
Turning off 54
Engine cleaning 236
Engine compartment
Fuse box in 287
Hood 217
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 25,
248
Engine number 311
Engine oil 218, 302
Adding 221
Additives 302
Checking level 218
Consumption 218
Messages in display 219
Oil dipstick 221
Viscosity 312
Enlarged cargo area 99
Error
Display messages 256
ESP 25, 80, 312
LOW RANGE mode 81
Malfunction indicator lamp 245, 246,
247
Switching off 81
Switching on 82
Synchronizing 246
Warning lamp 245, 246, 247, 251
ETD 312
Safety guidelines 62
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 67
Exterior mirrors
Folding 128
Exterior rear view mirrors 40
Adjusting 40
Folding electrically 128
325
Index
F
Fastening the seat belts 42
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 152
First aid kit 257
Flat tire 274
Lowering the vehicle 276
Mounting the spare wheel 274
Preparing the vehicle 274
Spare wheel 259
Flexible Service System (FSS) 232, 312
Fluid level
Automatic transmission 222
Fog lamp, rear 267
Fog lamps 111
Replacing bulbs 266
Fog lamps, front
Replacing bulbs 267
Switching on 111
Folding
Exterior mirrors 128
Folding electrically
Exterior rear view mirrors
128
4-ETS 25, 79
Indicator lamp 252
LOW RANGE mode 80
Malfunction indicator lamp 252
Warning lamp 251
Front airbags 63
Front fog lamps
Indicator lamp 253
Front lamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 268
Front towing eyes 285
FSS (Flexible Service System) 232, 312
Fuel 215
Additives 303
Fuel reserve warning lamp 252
Gasoline additives 303
Premium unleaded gasoline 215,
303
Requirements 303
Reserve warning 25
Fuel additives 303
Fuel filler flap 214
Locking 214
Opening 263
Unlocking 214
Fuel requirements 303
Fuel tank
Filler flap 214
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 300
Functions
Trip computer* 186
Fuse box 287, 288
Fuse chart 287
Fuses 287
Fuse box in engine compartment 287
Fuse box in passenger footwell 288
Fuse chart 287
Fuse extractor 287
Spare fuses 287
G
Garage door opener 29, 180
Erasing in remote control 185
Gasoline see Fuel 215
Gasoline additives 303
Gauge for
Coolant temperature 25
Fuel 25
Outside temperature 25
326
Index
Gear range 312
Automatic transmission 121
Limiting 121
Shifting into optimal 120
Gear range limit
Canceling 120
Gear selector lever
Cleaning 238
Position 122
Glass breakage sensor 84
Global Positioning System (GPS) 312
Glossary 311
Glove box 23, 164
Closing 164
Opening 164
Good visibility 126
GPS 312
H
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 238
Hazard warning flasher 112
Switching off 112
Switching on 112
Head restraints
Manual seats 36
Power seats* 38
Headlamp aim
Adjusting 272
Headlamp cleaning system* 224
Headlamps
Automatic control 108
Bi-Xenon* 311
Cleaning 236
Cleaning system* 131, 224
Refilling washer fluid 224
Switching off 54
Switching on 48
Washer fluid 307
Washer system 307
Headliner
Cleaning 238
Heated seats* 98
Height adjustment
Head restraints 36, 38
Seat belts 45
Steering wheel 39
High beam flasher 49, 110
High beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 269
Switching on 110
High mounted brake lamp 267
Replacing bulbs 271
Hood 217
Closing 218
Opening 217
Hooks
Loading 159
Hydroplaning 197
327
Index
I
Identification labels 292
Certification label 292
Vehicle identification number
(VIN) 292
Ignition 33
Immobilizer 83
Activating 54, 83
Deactivating 83
Indicator lamp
Adjustable steering column 253
Brake pad wear 254
Coolant 249
Front fog lamps 253
Low engine oil level 253
Indicators, additional
Speedometer display 256
Infant and child restraint systems 68
Installing 71
LATCH child seat mounts 72
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid* 177
Inside rear view mirror
Antiglare 126
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 71
Wiper blades 273
Instrument cluster 24, 116, 313
Cleaning 238
Coolant temperature gauge 117
Display in the speedometer 117
Illumination 116
Lamps in 252
Outside temperature indicator 118
Instruments and controls see Cockpit 22
Integrated remote control
Erasing memory 185
Operating 185
Interior lighting 112
Activating automatic control 113
Deactivating automatic control 113
Manual operation 113
Reading lamps 114
Interior storage spaces 164
Armrest 165
Cup holder 167
Glove box 164
Storage compartment in front of
armrest 165
Storage compartment under front pas-
senger seat* 164
Intermittent wiping 130
J
Jack 258
Jump starting 281
328
Index
K
Key
Global locking 89
Global unlocking 89
Loss of 90
Positions in steering lock 33
Remote control with folding key 88
Unlocking liftgate 89
Unlocking the driver’s door, fuel filler
flap 89
Key positions in steering lock 33
Key, Mechanical 261
Key, Remote control
Unlocking with 32
Kickdown 123, 313
L
Labels, identification 292
Lamp bulbs, exterior 266
Lamps, exterior
Front 266
Rear 267
Lamps, indicator and warning
4-ETS 251, 252
ABS 242
Adjustable steering column 253
AIRBAG OFF 63, 243
BAS 78, 245, 246, 247
Battery indicator lamp 254
Brake pad wear 254
Brakes 244
CHECK ENGINE 248
Coolant 249
EBP 245
Engine diagnostics 248
ESP 245, 246, 247, 251
Front fog lamps 253
Fuel reserve 252
Low engine oil level 253
LOW RANGE 252
Low washer system fluid level 253
Seat belts 253
Service indicator 232
SRS 255
Turn signals 25
LATCH child seat anchors 72
LATCH child seat mounts 72
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 293
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 239
Lever
For cruise control 150
License plate lamps
Replacing bulbs 267, 271
Liftgate
Closing 92
Opening 89, 91
Opening from inside 91
Opening from outside 91
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 238
Lighter
Rear center console 169
Lighter see cigarette lighter 168
329
Index
Lighting 107
Automatic headlamp mode 108
Cargo compartment 114
Combination switch 110
Daytime running lamp mode 109
Door entry lamps 113
Front fog lamps 111
High beam flasher 110
High beams 110
Instrument cluster illumination 116
Interior 112
Locator lighting 110
Night security illumination 109
Limiting the gear range 121
Limp Home Mode 124
Line of fall 313
Loading 157
Cargo area cover blind* 161
Cargo floor plates 162
Cargo tie-down rings 158
Hooks 159
Instructions 157, 158
Partition net* 159
Roof rack 163
Split rear bench seat 99
Trailer 208
Locator lighting 110
Lock button 313
Locking 88
Automatic while driving 93
Centrally from inside 94
Fuel filler flap 214
Global 89
Vehicle in an emergency 262
Locking knobs 32
Loss of keys 90
Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 291
Low beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 268
Switching on 48
Low engine oil level
Indicator lamp 253
LOW RANGE - 4-ETS 80
LOW RANGE - ABS 77
LOW RANGE - ESP 81
LOW RANGE mode 125
Low washer system fluid level
Indicator lamp 253
Lowering
Vehicle 276
M
Main dimensions 298
Maintenance 12
Display messages 256
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 263
Interior lighting control 113
Locking the vehicle 262
Sliding/pop-up roof* 265
Unlocking the driver’s door 261
Unlocking transmission selector
lever 264
330
Index
Manual seat
Adjusting 35
Adjusting backrest tilt 36
Adjusting head restraint height 36
Adjusting head restraint tilt 37, 39
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Seat height 36
MB Tex upholstery
Cleaning 239
MCS
Modular Control System 313
Mechanical key 261
Memory function 105, 313
Memory function* 106
Recalling positions from
memory 106
Mirror
Inside rear view mirror 40
Mirrors
Activating exterior mirror parking
position 127
Adjusting 40
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 126
Exterior rear view mirror 40
Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
ing position 106
MON 215
MON (Motor Octane Number) 313
Monitoring reach
Parktronic* 154
Multifunction display 313
N
Night security illumination 109
Deactivation temporarily 109
Setting time 109
O
Occupant safety 58
Children and airbags 60
Children in the vehicle 67
Fastening the seat belt 42
Infant and child restraint systems 68
LATCH child seat mounts 72
Seat belts 42, 62
Odometer display 117
Odometer, main 25
Off-road driving
Checklist 201, 206
Crossing obstacles 204
Driving instructions off-road
driving 200
Driving through water 203
Returning 205
Rules 201
Special driving features 201
Steep terrain 202
331
Index
Oil
Adding 221
Consumption 218
Dipstick 218
Oil dipstick 221
Viscosity 312
One-touch gearshifting 120
Canceling gear range limit 120
Downshifting 120
Upshifting 120
Opening
Doors from the inside 90
Fuel filler flap 214
Fuel filler flap manually 263
Glove box 164
Hood 217
Liftgate 89, 91
Liftgate from inside 91
Liftgate from outside 91
Rear quarter windows 146
Side windows 145
Sliding/pop-up roof* 148, 265
Sliding/pop-up roof* in an
emergency 265
Storage compartment in front of
armrest 166
Storage compartment under passenger
seat 165
Windows 145
Opening and closing
Side windows 144
Operating
Garage door opener 185
Integrated remote control 185
Radio transmitters 211
Vehicle outside the USA and
Canada 13
Operating safety 17
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 236
Outside temperature indicator 118
Overdue service 233
Overhead control panel 29
P
Paintwork 235
Panic alarm 75
Panic button on remote control 75
Parking and locking 53
Parking brake 47, 53
Engaging 53
Releasing 47
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 267, 269
Replacing the bulbs 269
Switching on 107
Parktronic* 153, 313
Cleaning system sensor 237
Monitoring reach 154
Sensor cover 237
Switching off 156
Switching on 156
Warning indicators 155
332
Index
Partition net* 159
Engaging 159
Removing 161
Tightening 160
Parts see Spare parts service
Passenger compartment 211
Interior lighting 112
Passenger footwell
Fuse box in 288
Passenger safety see Occupant
safety 58
Pedals 193
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 239
Poly-V-belt drive 314
Layout 293
Positions (Memory function*)
Recalling from memory 106
Storing into memory 106
Power assistance 193
Power seat*
Adjusting backrest tilt 38
Adjusting head restraint height 38
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 38
Adjusting seat height 38
Seat fore and aft adjustment 37
Power seats* 37
Power train 314
Power washer 235
Power windows
Blocking of rear door window
operation 73
Side windows 144
Synchronizing 146
Practical hints
First aid kit 257
Fuses 287
Lamps in instrument cluster 242
Spare wheel 259
Towing the vehicle 283
Vehicle jack 258
Vehicle tool kit 257
Premium unleaded gasoline 303
Problems
While driving 51
With vehicle 18
Product information 9
Programming or reprogramming the inte-
grated remote control 182
R
Radio transmitters, control and
operation 211
Rain sensor* 130, 131
Rapid seat heating
Switching off 99
Rapid seat heating*
Switching on 98
Reading lamp 29
333
Index
Reading lamps 114
Rear automatic climate control 141
Adjusting air volume and air distribu-
tion manually 141
Automatic mode 141
Rear bench seat
Foldable 99
Rear door window
Blocking operation 73
Rear fog lamp 267
Bulb 267
Switching on 111
Rear lamp bulbs
Replacing 270
Rear parking lamp
Replacing bulbs 270
Rear passenger compartment ventilation
and climate control
Activating 141
Deactivating 141
Rear passenger compartment ventilation
and rear automatic climate
control 141
Rear quarter windows* 146
Opening 146
Closing 147
Rear seats 99
Easy entry/exit feature* 101
Enlarging cargo area 99
Folding down backrest 100
Folding up 101
Folding up backrest 100
Fore and aft 99
Lowering 100
Third row* 102
Rear standing lamp
Replacing bulbs 270
Rear towing eyes 285
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 126
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 133
Activating 133
Deactivating 133
Rear window wiper 131
Rain sensor* 131
Rear window wiper/washer 51
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 279
Refrigerant
Air conditioning 302
Refueling 214
Regular checks 215
Reinstalling vehicle battery 279
Remote control
Changing battery 262
Global locking 89
Global unlocking 89
Synchronizing 263
Unlocking liftgate 89
Unlocking the driver’s door, fuel filler
flap 89
Unlocking with 32
Remote control with folding key 88
334
Index
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid* 179
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 314
Removing
Vehicle battery 279
Wheel 276
Wiper blades 273
Removing spare wheel 259
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 270
Brake lamp bulbs 270
Bulbs 266
Front lamp bulbs 268
Front turn signal bulbs 268
Fuses 287
High beam bulbs 269
High mounted brake lamp 271
License plate lamp bulbs 271
Low beam bulbs 268
Rear fog lamp bulbs 270
Rear lamp bulbs 267, 270
Rear parking lamp bulbs 270
Rear side marker lamp bulbs 270
Rear standing lamp bulbs 270
Rear turn signal bulbs 270
Wiper blades 273
Replacing front fog lamp bulb 270
Reporting
Safety defects 19
Resetting
Service indicator (FSS) 233
Trip odometer 118
Residual heat utilization 140, 314
Residual ventilation 140
REST (Residual engine heat
utilization) 314
Restraint system 314
Restraint system see Infant and child re-
straint systems 68, 71
Returning from off-road driving 205
Rims 295
Roadside assistance 12
Tele Aid* 175
RON 215
RON (Research Octane Number) 314
Roof rack 163
Rotating wheels 228
Rubber parts
Cleaning 239
S
Safety
Occupant 58
Safety belts see Seat belts 42
Safety defects
Reporting 19
Safety systems
Driving 76
Saving current speed 151
Seat belt force limiter 67
Seat belt height adjustment 45
335
Index
Seat belts 64
Cleaning 238
Fastening 42
Height adjustment 45
Proper use of 44, 66
Safety guidelines 62
Warning lamp 253
Seat heater*
Switching off 98
Switching on 98
Seats 95
Adjusting 34
Heater* 98
Manual 35
Power 37
Rapid seat heating* 98
Rear 99
Split rear bench seat 99
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings 158
Selector lever 26
Lock 46
Position 26, 119
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 70
Tele Aid* 172
Service
Calling up the service indicator 233
Major service (Service B) 232
Minor service (Service A) 232
Overdue 233
Spare parts
Types 233
When due 232
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 291
Service and warranty information 10
Service indicator 232
Calling up 233
Clearing 232, 233
Service indicator (FSS)
Display messages 256
Service life (tires) 227
Service System see FSS
Setting
Cruise control 151
Higher speed in cruise control 152
Hours (clock) 118
Lower speed in cruise control 152
Minutes (clock) 118
Slower speed in cruise control 152
Speed in cruise control 152
Setting date
Trip computer* 186
Setting language
Trip computer* 190
Shift lock 314
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 122
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 120
Side impact airbags 64
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 267, 269
336
Index
Side windows 144
Automatic closing 145
Automatic opening 145
Cleaning 237
Closing 145
Closing fully (Express-close) 145
Opening 145
Opening and closing 144
Opening fully (Express-open) 145
Rear quarter window 146
Stopping 145
Synchronizing power windows 146
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Rear window wiper/washer 51
Windshield wipers 50
Single wipe 50
Sliding/pop-up roof* 148
Closing 148, 265
Opening 148, 265
Synchronizing 149
Snow chains 231
Spare fuses 287
Spare parts service 290
Spare wheel 259
Mounting 274
Removing 259
Speed
Saving current 151
Speed settings
Cruise control 152
Speedometer 25
Speedometer display
Additional indicators 256
Split rear bench seat 99
SRS 66, 314
Indicator lamp 255
Standing lamps 107
Replacing bulbs 266, 267
Standing water
Driving instructions 200
StArt
Display messages 256
Starting difficulties 47
Starting position 33
Starting the engine 46
Steep terrain
Driving 202
Steering column
Height adjustment 39
Length adjustment 39
Steering lock 23, 33
Positions 33
Steering wheel
Adjusting 39
Adjustment 39
Cleaning 238
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 180
Stop watch 189
Stopping
Windows 145
Storage compartments
Glove box 164
Under front passenger seat* 164
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 106
Stranded vehicle 286
337
Index
Sun visor 132
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 314
Switching off
Automatic climate control 137
ESP 81
Hazard warning flasher 112
Headlamps 54
Rapid seat heating 99
Transmission control – LOW RANGE
mode 125
Switching on
Automatic climate control 137
ESP 82
Front fog lamps 111
Front fog lamps, rear fog lamp 111
Hazard warning flasher 112
Headlamps 48
High beams 110
Rapid seat heating* 98
Seat heating* 98
Transmission control – LOW RANGE
mode 125
Trip computer* 186
Windshield wipers 49
Synchronizing
ESP 246
Power windows 146
Remote control 263
Sliding/pop-up roof* 149
T
Tachometer 26, 118
Displaying gear range 121
Tail lamps 270
Cleaning 236
Replacing bulbs 267
Tar stains 235
Technical data 302
Brake fluid 302
Coolants 304
Electrical system 297
Engine 294
Engine oil 302
Engine oil additives 302
Fuel requirements 303
Gasoline additives 303
Main dimensions 298
Premium unleaded gasoline 303
Rims and tires 295
Weights 299
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 307
Tele Aid System* 315
338
Index
Tele Aid* 171
Emergency calls 173
Information 177
Initiating an emergency call
manually 175
Remote door unlock 179
Roadside assistance 175
Stolen vehicle tracking services 180
System self-check 172
Upgrade signals 178
Telematics* 315
Telephone* 170
Temperature
Grades of tires 309
Tires 228
Third row seats* 102
Folding down single seat 102
Installing single seat 104
Removing single seat 104
Storing single seat 103
Tie-down rings (Cargo
compartment) 158
Tightening torque 315
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 277
Tilt
Head restraint 37, 39
Time
Setting hours 118
Setting minutes 118
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 216, 227
Tire speed rating 198, 315
Tire traction 197
Tires 295, 308
Direction of rotation 227
Driving instructions 196
Retreads 226
Rims and tires 295
Rotating 228
Service life 227
Temperature 228
Temperature grades 309
Tread depth 230
Wear pattern 228
Winter 230
Tools 257
Vehicle jack 258
Vehicles with CD-changer* 258
Wheel bolt wrench 258
Tow-away alarm 29, 84
Arming 84
Disarming 84
Disarming for transport 84
Towing
Trailer 206
Towing a trailer 209
Automatic transmission 124
Towing eyes
Front 285
Rear 285
Towing the vehicle 283
Stranded vehicle 286
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 180
339
Index
Traction 308, 315
Trailer
Attaching 208
Loading 208
Towing 209
Trailer hitches 207
Trailer towing 206
Attaching a trailer 208
Checking weights 208
Electrical connections 207
Hitches 207
Loading 208
Weights and ratings 207
Trailer weights and ratings 207
Transfer case 315
Transmission control – LOW RANGE
mode 125
Switching off 125
Switching on 125
Transmission selector lever 264
Unlocking manually 264
Tread depth (tires) 230
Treadwear 308
Trip computer* 29, 186
Average fuel consumption 189
Compass 187
Country 190
Distance remaining 189
Language 190
Selecting functions 186
Setting date 186
Stop watch 189
Switching on 186
Trip odometer
Resetting 118
Trip odometer display 117
Trunk see Cargo compartment 89
Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 266, 267, 269
Turn signals 49
Additional in mirrors 266
Cleaning lenses 236
Front bulbs 266
Indicator lamps 25
Rear bulbs 267, 270
Turning off
Engine 54
U
Unlocking 32, 88
Centrally from inside 94
Driver’s door in an emergency 261
Driver’s door, fuel filler flap 89
Fuel filler flap 214
In an emergency 261
Transmission selector lever
manually 264
Vehicle in an emergency 179
With the remote control 32
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid* 178
Uphill driving
Cruise control 151
Upholstery
Cleaning 239
Upshifting 120
340
Index
Useful features 164
Ashtrays and cigarette lighter 168
Cup holder 166
Electrical outlet 170
Garage door opener 180
Interior storage spaces 164
Programming or reprogramming the in-
tegrated remote control 182
Tele Aid* 171
Telephone* 170
Trip computer* 186
V
Vehicle
Locking 28
Locking in an emergency 262
Lowering 276
Proper use of 17
Service battery 278
Towing 283
Unlocking 28
Unlocking in an emergency 261
Vehicle and trailer weights and
ratings 207
Vehicle battery 278
Vehicle care
Cup holder 238
Engine cleaning 236
Gear selector lever 238
Hard plastic trim items 238
Headlamps 236
Instrument cluster 238
Leather upholstery 239
Light alloy wheels 238
MB Tex upholstery 239
Ornamental moldings 236
Paintwork 235
Parktronic* system sensor 237
Plastic and rubber parts 239
Power washer 235
Seat belts 238
Steering wheel 238
Tail lamps 236
Tar stains 235
Turn signals 236
Upholstery 239
Vehicle washing 236
Window cleaning 237
Wiper blades 237
Vehicle identification number (VIN) 292
Vehicle jack 258
Vehicle lighting
Checking 216
Vehicle tool kit 257
Vehicle with CD-changer* 258
Vehicle washing 236
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 292,
315
Voice control system* 315
W
Warning indicators
Parktronic* 155
Warning sounds
Drivers seat belts 64
Parking brake 48
Warranty coverage 291
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 234
341
Index
Wear pattern (tires) 228
Weights 299
Wheel bolt wrench 258
Wheel change
Tightening torque 277
Wheels
Rotating 228
Window curtain airbags 64
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Defogging 138
Refilling washer fluid 224
Replacing wiper blades 273
Washer fluid 224, 307
Washer system 307
Windshield washer fluid 307
Filler neck 224
Mixing ratio 307
Refilling 224
Wiping with 50
Windshield washer system 307
Windshield wipers 49, 129
Intermittent 49
Interval wiping 130
Normal wiper speed 49
Rain sensor* 130
Rear window wiper/washer 51
Replacing wiper blades 273
Simultaneous wiping and washing 51
Single wipe 50
Switching on 49
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 50
Winter driving
Snow chains 231
Tires 230
Winter driving instructions 198
Winter tires 230
Wiper blades
Cleaning 237
Installing 273
Removing 273
Replacing 273
Wiper switch 49
Wiper/washer
Rear window 51
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 50
Intermittent 49, 130
With windshield washer fluid 50
Wiping and washing simultaneously 51
X
Xenon headlamps*
Bi-Xenon* 311
342
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2273-31
Press time 08/20/03
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Navigation menu